JP2016000343A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably suppressing a fraudulent act to a control board or of suitably detecting the fraudulent act when conducted.SOLUTION: A face change unit is provided with a main controller 610 that comprises: a main control board for executing control concerning a game; and a board box 630 that has an internal space and stores the main control board in the internal space. The main controller 610 is attached to a back plate part of the face change unit through a pedestal unit 710. The pedestal unit 710 is provided with a main controller monitoring switch 790 that monitors movement of the main controller 610 from a prescribed position when the main controller 610 is detached from the pedestal unit 710. The main controller monitoring switch 790 includes a retractable pin 791 that is provided in a manner capable of shifting to both positions for not detecting the movement of the main controller 610 and for detecting the movement.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines such as slot machines include a control board having an electronic component such as an MPU in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games are controlled by the control board.

  In this type of gaming machine, a number of fraudulent acts have been reported, such as replacing the control board MPU or the control board itself to change the contents of the game for the purpose of gaining unauthorized profits. Countermeasures are being considered.

JP 2008-23182 A

  However, there is still room for improvement in the crime prevention function of the gaming machine in order to make it difficult to cheat on the control board, or to facilitate the discovery of a fraudulent act.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and is a game capable of suitably suppressing fraudulent acts on the control board or suitably detecting such fraudulent acts. The purpose is to provide a machine.

The present invention
A control board for controlling the game,
An internal space is formed, and a substrate case in which the control board is accommodated in the internal space;
Holding means for detachably holding the substrate case;
Detecting means for detecting movement of the substrate case from a predetermined position relative to the holding means when the substrate case is removed from the holding means;
A base on which the holding means is movably attached;
A fixture for fixing the pedestal to a mounting base;
While the substrate case is held by the holding means, the movement range of the holding means is regulated to be a predetermined range, while the predetermined range is set when the substrate case is removed from the holding means. A regulating portion that allows the movement of the holding means beyond,
The holding means can be attached and detached when the holding means moves beyond the predetermined range.

  It is possible to suitably suppress fraud against the control board or to detect it appropriately when the fraud is performed.

It is a perspective view showing the whole slot machine composition in one embodiment. It is a front view of a slot machine. It is a side view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is opened. It is a front view of the slot machine in a state where the front door and the inner door are opened. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of a housing | casing. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a housing | casing. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the hopper apparatus from the housing | casing. (A) is a rear view of a hopper apparatus, (b) is a bottom view of a hopper apparatus. It is a plane schematic diagram of a lower plate. (A) is the schematic which looked at the mode that the hopper apparatus was mounted from the front of the slot machine, and (b) is the schematic view that the mode that the hopper apparatus was mounted from the side of the slot machine. It is a perspective view which shows the main structures of a partition plate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the surface change unit from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the surface change unit from the back side. It is a bottom view of a surface change unit. It is a perspective view of the surface change unit in the state where the inner door is opened. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a surface change unit for every main component. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of an inner side housing | casing. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between an inner side housing | casing and a partition plate unit. It is the elements on larger scale which expand and show a guide groove and a slide rail. (A) is a top view of a rail member, (b) is a side view of a rail member. It is the schematic which shows the mode at the time of the assembly | attachment of the inner housing | casing in the state which looked at the inner housing | casing from upper direction. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a fixing means for every main component. (A) is the AA partial fragmentary sectional view of FIG. 3, (b) is the BB partial sectional view of FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fixing means from the upper part, (b) is the exploded perspective view which looked at the fixing means from the upper part. (1) Group is a perspective view showing a state of mounting of the fixing means, and (2) Group is a partial cross-sectional view showing a state of mounting of the fixing means. (A) is the elements on larger scale of FIG. 9, (b) is the sectional view on the AA line of (a). (A) is the elements on larger scale of FIG. 16, (b) is the BB sectional drawing of (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the main controller unit from the front side. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows main controller unit 600 for each main component. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the holding member from the front side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the holding member from the back side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the main controller from the front side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the main controller from the back side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the main control device in an exploded manner for each main component. (A) is the CC sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 29, (b) is the DD sectional view taken on the line of FIG. (A) is a side view which shows the state which the main control apparatus has closed with respect to the base member, (b) is a side view which shows the state in which the main control apparatus is open with respect to the base member. It is a top view which shows the relationship between a main controller and a main controller monitoring switch. It is a partial schematic diagram showing the operation of the main controller monitoring switch. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a sub-control apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a sub-control apparatus. It is a partial expansion perspective view which shows the mounting state of an external concentration terminal board. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows an external concentration terminal board and a holder member. FIG. 42 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 41. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure regarding abnormality monitoring and alerting | reporting of the monitoring result. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of sub-side RAM, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of monitoring side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by the monitoring side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process performed by the monitoring side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for time etc. setting performed by the monitoring side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality notification setting performed by the monitoring side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for abnormality notification cancellation performed by the monitoring side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification setting process of the normal time performed by sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality notification setting process at the time of starting performed by sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for alerting | release cancellation performed by sub-side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the mode of alerting | reporting with respect to the abnormality identified by the monitoring side MPU. (A), (b) is the schematic which shows the modification regarding a main controller monitoring switch, (c), (d) is the schematic which shows the relationship between a main controller and a holding member. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a main controller and a holding member. It is a perspective view which shows the modification of the structure regarding a hopper monitoring switch. It is the schematic which shows the modification of the structure regarding a hopper monitoring switch.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in the case of application to a spinning cylinder type gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 3 is a side view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open. FIG. In the slot machine 10, a surface changing unit 300 having an inner door 400 is provided inside the slot machine 10. FIG. 5 is a front view showing a state in which the front door 12 and the inner door 400 are opened. The configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, directions such as up, down, left and right are specified based on the front view of the slot machine 10.

<External configuration of housing 11>
The slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 includes a wooden top plate 11a, a bottom plate 11b, a back plate 11c, a left side plate 11d, and a right side plate 11e formed in a plate shape (see the perspective view of the case in FIG. 4). 11e is fixed by fixing means such as adhesion, so that it is formed in a box shape whose front side is opened as a whole. In addition, each board 11a-11e may be comprised with a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel other than being comprised with a wooden panel, or even if it is formed in the integral box shape with a synthetic resin material or a metal material. Good. Moreover, the structure which has the unevenness | corrugation by the opening part which penetrated inside and outside, a rib, etc. may be sufficient as each board 11a-11e. The casing 11 configured as described above is attached by, for example, driving nails against a so-called island facility at the time of installation in the game hall.

<Description of front door 12>
A front door 12 as a front open / close door is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. The front door 12 is provided so as to block all of the front opening portion of the housing 11, and is opened to the front side with the left edge portion of the slot machine 10 as an axis. Further, on the peripheral edge of the front door 12, there is provided an overhanging portion 15 protruding so as to be close to the front end surface of each of the top plate 11a, the bottom plate 11b, the left side plate 11d, and the right side plate 11e.

  In the upper half of the front door 12, an upper viewing window 21 and a lower viewing window 22 are arranged in parallel up and down toward the front. The viewing windows 21 and 22 are provided with transparent panels 23 and 24 (see FIG. 1) made of a transparent plate material and having substantially the same shape as the viewing windows 21 and 22. The transparent panels 23 and 24 are fixed to the back side of the front door 12 with fasteners (not shown) such as screws. In the present embodiment, in particular, the transparent panels 23 and 24 are constituted by a single plate.

  The rear of the front door 12 is visible through these transparent panels 23 and 24. In other words, a decorative pattern provided behind the front door 12 and a liquid crystal pattern, which will be described later, can be viewed through the viewing windows 21 and 22.

  On the front side of the front door 12, an enclosure 25 surrounding the viewing windows 21 and 22 is formed on the upper edge and the left and right edges so as to protrude forward from the transparent panels 23 and 24. In addition, a central lamp portion 26 for performing a lamp effect or the like according to the game situation is provided on the upper portion of the enclosure portion 25.

  Below the lower viewing window 22 is an operation unit provided with various operation members operated by a player, a medal insertion device 30, a MAX bet switch 40, a 1 bet switch 41, a start lever 45, Stop switches 50 to 52, a settlement switch 55, and a return switch 60 are provided. Hereinafter, each component will be described individually.

  The medal insertion device 30 is provided on the lower right side of the lower viewing window 22, and medals as investment values are inserted one by one from the insertion port of the medal insertion device 30. The medal insertion device 30 constitutes an input means for inputting an investment value, and if attention is paid to the point that the medal insertion device 30 involves an operation of direct insertion of a medal by a player, a direct input means for directly inputting the investment value is constituted. It can be said that.

  The medals inserted from the medal insertion device 30 are sent to the passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. That is, a selector 31 as a passage switching means is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12, and medals inserted from the medal insertion device 30 are placed in either the storage passage 32 or the discharge passage 33 by the selector 31. Guided (see FIG. 4). The selector 31 is provided with a medal path switching solenoid. When the medal path switching solenoid is not excited, the medal path is set to the discharge path 33 side, and when excited, the medal path switching solenoid is switched to the storage path 32 side. In this case, the medal guided to the storage passage 32 is guided to a hopper device 180 described later. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 33 is guided to the medal tray 81 from the medal discharge port 34 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  A button-like MAX bet switch 40 is provided on the lower left side of the lower viewing window 22, and by pressing the MAX bet switch 40, three credited virtual medals can be inserted at a time. A button-like 1-bet switch 41 smaller than the MAX bet switch 40 is provided on the left side of the MAX bet switch 40. By pressing the 1-bet switch 41, one virtual medal is inserted at a time. Each bet switch 40, 41 constitutes an input means for inputting an investment value together with the medal insertion device 30. Further, if the medal insertion device 30 is accompanied by an operation of direct insertion of medals by a player, the bet switches 40 and 41 are only accompanied by an operation of insertion of virtual medals based on credits. It can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting the investment value.

  Note that the MAX bet switch 40 has a built-in lamp as a light emitting member (not shown) in order to notify the player that the maximum number of medals that can be inserted per game (three) has not been reached. The lamp is turned on in a situation where the switch operation of the MAX bet switch 40 is valid and prompts the operation of the switch 40. However, when there is no credited virtual medal, or three medals have already been inserted. Turns off under circumstances. Here, instead of the above-described lighting, the player may make it easier to understand the prompt for medal insertion by blinking.

  A start lever 45 is provided below the MAX bet switch 40. The start lever 45 is an operation member for starting rotation of each reel (rotating body) 555 to 557 of the reel device 550 described later, and is operated to start rotation of each reel 555 to 557, that is, start variable display. Start operation means or start operation means.

  On the right side of the start lever 45, three button-like stop switches 50 to 52 are arranged side by side. The stop switches 50 to 52 are provided so as to correspond to the reels 555 to 557 (three reels of left, center, and right) to be stopped, and individually stop the rotating reels 555 to 557. Therefore, stop operation means operated for the purpose is configured. Each of the stop switches 50 to 52 can be stopped when the reels 555 to 557 are rotated at a constant speed, and a stop operation can be performed by lighting a lamp (not shown) during such a state. Is notified, and is turned off when the rotation stops.

  On the left side of the start lever 45, a button-like settlement switch 55 is provided. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for example, 50 medals) or winning medals as credit medals. The credit medal is paid out as an actual medal by depressing the settlement switch 55 in a state where is stored and stored. In this case, if paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the checkout switch 55 constitutes a checkout operation means for actually paying out the stored game value.

  It should be noted that the surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for example, 50 medals) or the “credit mode” set to store and memorize the winning medals as a credit medal, the surplus inserted medals, In the case of a slot machine that can switch between the “direct mode” set so that the winning medal at the time of winning is paid out as an actual medal, the settlement switch 55 has a function as a switching switch for mode switching. May be added. The settlement switch (changeover switch) 55 is turned on when pressed once, turned off when pressed again, and turned on / off every time a pressing operation is performed. When the settlement switch 55 is on, the credit mode is selected. When the settlement switch 55 is off, the direct mode is selected. If there is a credit medal when the credit mode is switched to the direct mode, the corresponding credit medal is paid out as an actual medal. Thereby, the player can execute the game in a format according to his / her preference by switching between the credit mode and the direct mode. The settlement switch 55 constitutes a switching operation means for switching the input value and game value handling formats.

  A button-like return switch 60 is provided below the medal insertion device 30 (on the right side of the stop switch 52). The return switch 60 is a switch that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion device 30 is jammed in the selector 31. When the switch 60 is pressed, the selector 31 is mechanically interlocked to operate. A medal jammed in the selector 31 is returned from the medal discharge port 34.

  A key hole 70 penetrating behind the front door 12 is provided on the right end side of the front door 12 on the right side of the return switch 60, and a key cylinder 71 is provided in the key hole 70 from the back side of the door. Yes. The key cylinder 71 constitutes a locking device that is operated to open the front door 12. However, details of the locking device will be described later.

  Below the stop switches 50 to 52, a lower plate 80 on which a model name, a character related to a game, and the like are displayed is mounted, and a medal tray 81 is provided below the lower plate 80. The medal is discharged from the hopper device 180 inside the slot machine to the medal tray 81 through the medal discharge port 34. Speaker units 82 and 83 are provided on the left and right sides of the medal discharge port 34, and an ashtray 84 that can be reversed to the front side is provided on the left side of the medal tray 81 (the front side of the left speaker unit 82). Yes.

  When playing a game, the center lamp unit 26 and the speaker units 82 and 83 perform lamp effects, sound effects, and the like according to the game situation each time. In other words, the player is notified of the establishment of the combination by appropriately changing the light emission color or light emission pattern by the central lamp unit 26 or by appropriately changing the sound pattern by the speaker units 82 and 83. In addition, error notification or the like can be performed using the central lamp unit 26 and the speaker units 82 and 83.

  The lower part of the front door 12 is shaped so as to be continuous with the enclosure part 25, and the left and right sides above the medal tray 81 and the ashtray 84 are side wall parts 85. The side wall 85 is provided with a notch 86. For example, when a medal lending device is installed on the side of the slot machine 10 and a medal supply nozzle or the like is extended from the medal lending device, a medal supply nozzle is disposed in the notch 86, and a medal tray 81 is provided via this nozzle. The medals will be lent out. As a result, inconveniences such as nozzles getting in the way during games and rented medals falling out are eliminated.

<Internal structure of housing 11>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 10 will be described. First, the internal structure of the housing 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 is a front view showing the internal structure of the housing 11, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the internal structure.

  A long door support fitting 100 is fixed to the left side plate 11d of the casing 11 with a fastener (not shown) such as a screw along the inner periphery of the opening of the casing 11. Support shafts 101 and 102 are provided at two upper and lower portions of the door support fitting 100, and each of the support shafts 101 and 102 has a tapered shaft portion extending upward. The front door 12 is rotatably supported by the door support fitting 100.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 4, the front door 12 has bearing fittings 111 and 112 having insertion holes into which the shaft portions of the support shafts 101 and 102 are inserted corresponding to the support shafts 101 and 102, respectively. Is provided. The shafts of the support shafts 101 and 102 are inserted into the insertion holes of the bearing fittings 111 and 112 by lowering the front door 12 after the bearing fittings 111 and 112 are arranged above the support shafts 101 and 102. It is assumed that it was done. As a result, the front door 12 is supported so as to be pivotable about an axis connecting the two support shafts 101 and 102 with respect to the casing 11, and the front opening side of the casing 11 is opened or closed by the rotation. It is configured to be able to.

  On the right side plate 11 e of the housing 11, an elongated hook receiving metal fitting 120 is fixed along the inner peripheral edge of the opening of the housing 11 with a fastener (not shown) such as a screw. In addition, hook receiving portions 121 and 122 for holding the front door 12 in a closed state are provided at two places on the upper and lower sides of the hook receiving metal 120. The front door 12 is held in a state in which the front door 12 is closed to the housing 11 by the hook metal fitting 120.

  Referring to FIGS. 1 and 4 again, on the right end side of the front door 12, that is, on the side opposite to the rotation center axis side (rotation base end side) of the front door 12 (rotation distal end side), A locking device is provided. The locking device includes a base frame (not shown) that extends in the vertical direction and is fixed to the front door 12, a key cylinder 71 that is provided so as to extend from the top of the base frame to the front of the front door 12, and the base frame It has a long interlocking rod (not shown) assembled so as to be movable in the direction. And only the key cylinder 71 is provided in the state which protruded ahead of the front door 12 among the locking devices. In the present embodiment, OMLOCK (trade name) having a high function of preventing unauthorized unlocking is used as the key cylinder 71. The interlocking rod is moved downward by operating the operation key K inserted into the key cylinder 71 clockwise. The interlocking rod is provided with a pair of upper and lower flange fittings 131 and 132 corresponding to the flange receiving portions 121 and 122, and when the front door 12 is closed with respect to the casing 11, Each hook metal 131, 132 is locked to each hook receiving portion 121, 122, and is locked. Each hook 131, 132 is provided with a biasing member such as a coil spring that biases toward the side that maintains the locked state. When the operation key K is operated clockwise with respect to the key cylinder 71, the interlocking rod moves downward, and the hooks 131 and 132 are moved against the biasing force of the biasing member. The locked state of the metal fittings 131 and 132 and the hook receiving portions 121 and 122 is released, and the locked state of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 is released.

  As shown in FIG. 6 etc., the metal upper plate 140 which connects these both metal fittings 100 and 120 is being fixed to the inner board surface (lower surface) in the top plate 11a using the fixing tool (specifically screw). Similarly, on the inner plate surface (upper surface) of the bottom plate 11b, a metal lower plate 150 that connects the metal fittings 100 and 120 is fixed by a fixture (specifically, a screw). Each plate 140, 150 is bent so that both end portions on the side plates 11d, 11e overlap the metal fittings 100, 120, and each side plate 11d is fixed by a fixture (specifically, a screw) inserted through the overlapping portion. , 11e together with metal fittings 100, 120 (fastened together). The metal fittings 100 and 120 and the plates 140 and 150 are connected to each other as described above, thereby forming an annular shape along the opening edge of the housing 11. Thereby, the housing | casing 11 is reinforced. In addition, the fixing tool mentioned above is not limited to a screw. The fixing tool only needs to fix at least the plates 140 and 150 and the metal fittings 100 and 120. For example, a locking member or the like can be used.

  The front end portions of the plates 140 and 150 protrude from the opening edge of the housing 11 to the front of the slot machine 10, and the front end portions of the metal fittings 100 and 120 also protrude to the front of the slot machine 10 over the entire area of the opening edge. ing. That is, when the front door 12 is closed, the plates 140 and 150 and the metal fittings 100 and 120 cover the gap between the opening edge of the housing 11 and the outer peripheral rear end of the front door 12 from the inside. It is configured. As described above, by arranging the metal fittings 100 and 120 and the plates 140 and 150, it becomes difficult to infiltrate a wire, a film, or the like from the gap described above, and unauthorized access to the inside of the housing 11 can be suppressed. It has become. That is, the plates 140 and 150 and the metal fittings 100 and 120 have a function as a shielding material for the opening of the housing 11.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a power supply box 170 is provided in the lower left corner (rotation base end side) inside the housing 11, and the power supply box 170 is a bottom plate 11 b of the housing 11. And fixed to the left side plate 11d. The power supply box 170 is a power supply device for supplying power to various electric devices, control devices, and the like, and includes a power switch 171 that is a start switch.

<Configuration related to hopper device 180>
A hopper device 180 as a payout means for giving a medal to the player is installed next to the power supply box 170 inside the housing 11. That is, the power supply box 170 and the hopper device 180 are arranged side by side in the front view of the slot machine 10. Here, the hopper device 180 and the configuration accompanying it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing a state where the hopper device 180 is removed from the housing 11, FIG. 9A is a rear view of the hopper device 180, and FIG. 9B is a bottom view of the hopper device 180.

  The hopper device 180 includes a storage tank 181 as a medal storage unit and a payout device 191 that sequentially pays out medals flowing from the storage tank 181, and the payout device 191 is placed on the lower plate 150 described above. In this state, the lower plate 150 is movably supported.

  The storage tank 181 is opened upward and has a predetermined depth so that a large number of medals can be stored. Moreover, the bottom part 182 of the storage tank 181 is formed with an opening continuous with the inlet part of the dispensing device 191, and the bottom part 182 is inclined downward toward the opening. For this reason, medals located on the bottom 182 of the storage tank 181 flow into the dispensing device 191 due to their own weight.

  The payout device 191 has a housing 192 that forms the outline of the payout device 191. The housing 192 accommodates a rotating disk 193 that is rotatably supported and a drive motor 194 that drives the rotating disk 193. By driving the rotary disk 193, a predetermined number of medals are discharged from the payout opening 195 formed in the housing 192 to the outside of the payout device 191. The payout port 195 is disposed so as to communicate with the receiving port 36 formed in the discharge passage 33 of the front door 12, and medals discharged from the payout port 195 pass through the receiving port 36 and the discharge passage 33. To the medal tray 81.

  The housing 192 houses a payout control board 196 that controls the payout of medals by operating the drive motor 194 and a medal detection sensor 197 that detects the payout medals. By using the medal detection sensor 197 to monitor whether or not the number of medals to be paid out is a predetermined number, it is possible to suitably avoid the disadvantage that the player suffers disadvantages and to make illegal acquisition of medals difficult. It is supposed to be. The payout control board 196 and the medal detection sensor 197 are electrically connected to a main controller 610, which will be described later, via a connector 198 that is exposed outside the housing 192.

  The payout control board 196 and the medal detection sensor 197 are detachable through an opening 199 formed in a portion facing the bottom of the housing 192, specifically the bottom plate 11b (specifically, the upper surface of the lower plate 150). (See FIG. 9B and the like). The opening 199 faces the bottom plate 11b side and is covered with a metal cover member 210 formed corresponding to the opening 199, thereby avoiding exposure of the dispensing control board 196 and the like to the outside of the housing 192. Yes. The cover member 210 is integrated with the housing 192 by attaching a fixture 211 (specifically, a screw) from the bottom plate 11b side. Note that the fixing member 211 is not necessarily used for fixing the cover member 210. Any cover member 210 may be used as long as the cover member 210 can be fixed to the housing 192. For example, one of the cover member 210 and the housing 192 may be formed with a locking portion that is hooked with respect to the other, or the locking member is hooked with both. It is also possible to use a member or the like.

  The storage tank 181 has a medal discharge hole 183 formed in the tank side wall, and a guide plate 184 for guiding the medal out of the storage tank 181 is attached to the medal discharge hole 183. When a large number of medals are stored in the storage tank 181 and the height exceeds the height at which the guide plate 184 is provided, the surplus medals slide down on the plate surface of the guide plate 184 and are stored through the medal discharge hole 183. The tank 181 is discharged to the outside.

  Inside the housing 11, a spare tank 220 is installed next to the hopper device 180, specifically between the right side plate 11 e and the hopper device 180. When a predetermined amount or more of medals are stored in the storage tank 181, the surplus medals are guided to the reserve tank 220 by the guide plate 184 and stored in the reserve tank 220.

  As shown in FIG. 5 and the like, the hopper device 180 is disposed at a position sandwiched between the power supply box 170 and the spare tank 220 so as to be close to the power supply box 170 and the like. For this reason, it is difficult to insert a hand into both sides of the hopper device 180, and it is assumed that it is difficult to lift the hopper device 180, for example, when the hopper device 180 is attached or detached. In this respect, in the present embodiment, workability is improved by adopting a configuration in which the hopper device 180 is slidably supported. Hereinafter, the structure which supports the hopper apparatus 180 so that a slide movement is possible based on FIGS. 8-11 is demonstrated. 10 is a schematic plan view of the lower plate 150, FIG. 11A is a schematic view of the state in which the hopper device 180 is mounted as viewed from the front of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 11B is a diagram in which the hopper device 180 is mounted. FIG. 3 is a schematic view of the state seen from the side of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 10, the casing 11, the power supply box 170, the spare tank 220, and the hopper device 180 are indicated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIGS. The hopper device 180 and the like are indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and the like, the lower plate 150 has a base portion 151 on which the hopper device 180 is placed. The base portion 151 has a flat plate shape facing the bottom plate 11b, and a plurality of fixtures 152 (specifically, four screws) with respect to the bottom plate 11b in a state where the lower surface is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 11b. It is fixed by attaching. Some of the plurality of fixtures 152 are arranged so as to be hidden behind the dispensing device 191 in a state where the hopper device 180 is mounted. That is, some of the fixing tools 152 are disposed in a region sandwiched between the payout device 191 and the back plate 11c. This makes it difficult to remove the fixture 152. In the present embodiment, in particular, the two fixing tools 152 are arranged behind the dispensing device 191. Thereby, even if it is a case where all the other fixing tools 152 are removed, it can suppress that the hopper apparatus 180 rotates, and the structure preferable in practice is implement | achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11B, a part of the storage tank 181 is located above the fixture 152 disposed behind the dispensing device 191. More specifically, the storage tank 181 has an overhanging portion 185 formed so as to protrude rearward from the dispensing device 191 in a plan view of the slot machine 10, and the overhanging portion 185 is a fixture 152. It is located on the extension line of the removal orbit. Thereby, in the state where the hopper device 180 is mounted, it is difficult to remove the fixing member 152, and the inconvenience that the lower plate 150 is illegally removed is less likely to occur.

  A pair of guide rails 153 that define the direction in which the hopper device 180 is attached / detached are bent on the base portion 151. The guide rails 153 extend in the front-rear direction, and are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval. More specifically, each guide rail 153 includes an upright portion 154 that stands up from the base portion 151 and faces each other, and a bent portion 155 that is formed by bending the tip end portion of the upright portion 154 inwardly. Groove shape extending to

  At the lower end portion of the hopper device 180 (specifically, the left outer wall portion 201 and the right outer wall portion 202 of the housing 192), protrusions 212 that fit into the respective guide rails 153 are formed. The protruding portion 212 extends in the same direction as the guide rail 153 and is set so that its entire length is substantially equal to the entire length of the guide rail 153. That is, in a state where the hopper device 180 is mounted, almost the entire region of the protruding portion 212 is fitted to the guide rail 153.

  By pushing and pulling the hopper device 180 in a state where the protruding portions 212 are fitted in the respective guide rails 153, variations in the attachment / detachment track of the hopper device 180 can be suppressed. Specifically, the thickness dimension (vertical size) of the protrusion 212 is set to be equal to the gap dimension between the bent portion 155 and the base portion 151. And the dimension between the outer ends of both the protrusions 212 is set to be equivalent to the distance between the upright parts 154. For this reason, by inserting the protrusion 212 into the guide rail 153, the position variation of the hopper device 180 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is suppressed.

  On the front side (front side) of each guide rail 153, similarly to these guide rails 153, an introduction portion 160 having an upright portion 158 and a bent portion 159 and guiding each protrusion 212 to the guide rail 153 is provided. Yes. The introduction part 160 has a gap dimension between the bent part 159 and the base part 151 in the introduction part 160 larger than a gap dimension between the bent part 155 and the base part 151 in the guide rail 153, and The dimension difference is formed so as to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the protrusion 212. Thereby, it is possible to easily guide the protrusion 212 fitted to the introduction portion 160 to the guide rail 153. Moreover, when the protrusion 212 rides on the guide rail 153, it is possible to make it difficult to cause inconvenience such as incomplete mounting of the hopper device 180, and it is possible to visually confirm incomplete mounting.

  A pair of left and right guide inclined portions 161 are provided on the front side of each introduction portion 160. The guide inclined portion 161 has a plate-like shape that stands up from the base portion 151, and the interval dimension on the guide rail 153 side is substantially the same as the interval dimension of both the upright portions 154, and on the opening side of the housing 11. It is formed so that the interval of. Even when the hopper device 180 is pushed in while being displaced from side to side when the hopper device 180 is mounted, the protruding portion 212 abuts on the guide inclined portion 161 and moves along the guide inclined portion 161. It becomes. As a result, both protrusions 212 are guided to the entrance of the guide rail 153 (specifically, the introduction part 160).

  By providing the introduction portion 160 and the guide inclined portion 161 in this manner, the guide accuracy by the guide rail 153 can be improved, the work at the time of assembly can be facilitated, and a practically preferable configuration is realized. .

  On the back side of the guide rail 153, it comes into contact with a contact surface 213 formed on a portion (rear outer wall portion 203) facing the back plate 11 c in the housing 192, so that the hopper device 180 is moved to the back side of the housing 11. A stopper 165 for restricting the movement of the base portion 151 is formed by bending a part of the base portion 151. Focusing on the point that defines the position of the hopper device 180 in the depth direction, it can be said that the stopper 165 and the rear outer wall portion 203 constitute positioning means for defining the mounting completion position of the hopper device 180.

  In the present embodiment, one of the features is that a hopper monitoring switch 230 is provided for monitoring whether or not the hopper device 180 is disposed within a predetermined range including the mounting completion position. Hereinafter, the hopper monitoring switch 230 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8 and 11.

  As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11B, the hopper monitoring switch 230 has a region that overlaps vertically with the hopper device 180 (specifically, the payout device 191) arranged in the mounting completion position in the base portion 151 (hereinafter referred to as mounting for convenience). (Referred to as area E1). More specifically, it is arranged at a position biased to the back plate 11c in the mounting area E1.

  The hopper monitoring switch 230 includes a lever member 231 that rotates based on contact with the hopper device 180 and a holder member 241 that rotatably holds the lever member 231. Specifically, the lever member 231 is pivotally supported by a shaft portion 242 provided on the holder member 241. The holder member 241 is formed with an accommodation recess 243 for accommodating the lever member 231, and the lever member 231 protrudes from the accommodation recess 243 to the outside of the holder member 241 by rotating about the central axis of the shaft portion 242. It is the composition to do. Specifically, the pivot center axis of the lever member 231 extends in a direction intersecting the detachment direction of the hopper device 180 defined by the guide rail 153, specifically, a direction orthogonal to the lever member 231. The lever member 231 protrudes so that the distal end portion of the lever member 231 is located behind the axis.

  The holder member 241 is provided with a biasing member (specifically, a torsion coil spring) that biases the lever member 231 toward the side protruding from the housing recess 243, and the lever member 231 is always biased by the torsion coil spring. It is in the state. The housing recess 243 is formed with a restricting portion 244 that restricts the rotation of the lever member 231 by abutting against the lever member 231 when the lever member 231 rotates to the protruding side. When the amount of rotation of the lever member 231 reaches a predetermined value, the lever member 231 comes into contact with the restricting portion 244. That is, the restricting portion 244 defines the maximum protruding position of the lever member 231 (the maximum protruding amount from the housing recess 243).

  A bottomed recess 246 into which the holder member 241 is fitted is formed on the bottom plate 11 b of the housing 11. A base portion 166 on which the holder member 241 is mounted is formed in a portion corresponding to the concave portion 246 in the base portion 151, and a through hole 167 that penetrates into and out of the concave portion 246 is provided in the approximate center of the base portion 166. ing. In a state where the holder member 241 is attached to the pedestal portion 166, the open portion of the holder member 241 and the lever member 231 are configured to protrude toward the hopper device 180 through the through hole 167. The holder member 241 is formed with a hook portion 245 that restricts the holder member 241, that is, the hopper monitoring switch 230 from being removed by being hooked on the pedestal portion 166 from the concave portion 246 side (see FIG. 11B). Since the above-described through-hole 167 is blocked by the holder member 241 itself, it is difficult to access the hooking portion 245 from the outside of the recess 246. That is, in order to remove the hopper monitoring switch 230, it is necessary to first remove the lower plate 150 from the housing 11. Thus, by setting a predetermined procedure for removing the hopper monitoring switch 230, it is difficult to perform unauthorized removal of the hopper monitoring switch 230.

  The hopper device 180 (specifically, the housing 192) accommodates the pedestal portion 166 and a part of the hopper monitoring switch 230 protruding from the pedestal portion 166 in a state where the hopper device 180 is disposed at the mounting completion position. An accommodation space HS is provided.

  Here, the structure regarding the accommodation space HS will be described in detail. A bottom wall of the housing 192 is provided with a peripheral wall 205 that forms the opening 199 and surrounds the cover member 210. The peripheral wall 205 connects a part of the rear outer wall part 203 of the housing 192 and a part of the front outer wall part 204 to the right wall partition part 206 and the left partition part that connect the outer wall parts 201 and 202 and extend in the mounting direction of the hopper device 180. 207. The peripheral wall 205 is formed so as to be orthogonal to the base portion 151, and defines the attaching / detaching direction of the cover member 210. In addition, almost the entire edge of the peripheral wall 205 on the side of the base portion 151 (that is, the opening 199) is close to the base portion 151. That is, the cover member 210 cannot be removed while the hopper device 180 is placed on the base portion 151, and the cover member 210 can be removed by removing the hopper device 180. It is configured.

  The cover member 210 is attached to the back side of the region surrounded by the peripheral wall 205 so as to face the base portion 151 at a predetermined interval (specifically, in parallel). The peripheral wall 205 and the cover member 210 form an accommodation space HS that is open to the base portion 151 side. Note that the fixture for fixing the cover member 210 is also accommodated in the accommodation space HS.

  An insertion port 208 is formed in the rear outer wall 203 constituting the peripheral wall 205 so as to avoid interference with the pedestal 166 and the holder member 241. The insertion port 208 is open to both the bottom plate 11b and the back plate 11c, and when the hopper device 180 is mounted, the pedestal 166 and the holder member 241 are placed in the accommodation space HS via the insertion port 208. Will be moved to.

  As described above in detail, it is difficult to access the hopper monitoring switch 230 when the hopper monitoring switch 230 is housed in the housing portion 214 by enclosing the hopper monitoring switch 230 with the housing 192 and the lower plate 150. It will be something.

  As already described, the rotation center axis of the lever member 231 extends in a direction intersecting, specifically, a direction orthogonal to the attaching / detaching direction of the hopper device 180 defined by the guide rail 153. The lever member 231 is formed with an abutting portion 232 that abuts the hopper device 180 at a position on the rear side of the rotation center axis. The contact portion 232 has a flat surface portion 233 that comes into contact with the entrance (insertion port 208) of the accommodation space HS. The flat surface portion 233 faces the open side of the housing 11 and is formed so as to incline upward from the near side of the housing 11 to the back side. Further, in the state where the lever member 231 is disposed at the maximum projecting position, the height dimension of the flat surface part 233 from the base part 151 is larger than the height dimension from the base part 151 of the upper edge of the insertion port 208. It is set to be.

  A curved surface portion 234 that is smoothly continuous with the flat surface portion 233 is formed on the rotation tip side of the abutting portion 232, and the base of the curved surface portion 234 is in a state where the lever member 231 is disposed at the maximum projecting position. The height dimension from the portion 151 is set to be larger than the height dimension from the base portion 151 of the cover member 210. For this reason, the lever member 231 and the hopper device 180 come into contact with each other based on the movement of the hopper device 180 to the mounting position, and the position of the lever member 231 is changed. In this way, the position of the lever member 231 is switched, and it is detected that the hopper device 180 is mounted by moving from the maximum projecting position. In other words, it is detected that the hopper device 180 is mounted based on the movement of the lever member 231 from the maximum protruding position, and the movement of the hopper 180 is detected by moving to the maximum protruding position. The insertion port 208 described above is formed so that the upper end edge thereof is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the cover member 210. That is, the upper end edge of the insertion port 208 is continuous with the lower surface of the cover member 210 without a step. Thereby, the grip when the lever member 231 comes out of the accommodating part 214 is avoided.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the maximum protrusion amount of the lever member 231 is the same as that of the contact portion 232 when the hopper device 180 (specifically, the protruding portion 212) is placed on the bent portion 159 of the guide rail 153. The cover member 210 is set so as not to contact. For this reason, when the hopper device 180 is not normally mounted, the fact can be grasped by the hopper monitoring switch 230. Incidentally, such a configuration relating to prevention of erroneous mounting is not essential, and a configuration in which mounting of the hopper device 180 can be detected even when the hopper device 180 rides on the guide rail 153 may be adopted.

  The hopper monitoring switch 230 has a function of constantly monitoring the movement of the hopper device 180 outside the predetermined range for 24 hours, and is electrically connected to a sub-control device 800 described later. In a state where the hopper device 180 is disposed at the mounting completion position, the lever member 231 is tilted to detect the mounting of the hopper device 180, and in a state where the hopper device 180 is moved from the mounting completion position, the lever member 231 returns to the protruding position and returns to the hopper. The movement (for example, removal) of the device 180 is detected. When the hopper device 180 is not in the mounting completion position, the signal path to the sub-control device 800 to be connected is cut off, so that the sub-control device 800 cannot receive the detection signal, and the hopper device 180 cannot receive the detection signal. When the device 180 is in the mounting completion position, the signal path to the connection target sub-control device 800 becomes conductive, so that the sub-control device 800 can receive a detection signal.

  The hopper monitoring device is not limited to the above configuration, and a known sensor may be used. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the HI level signal and the LOW level signal is output when the hopper device 180 is not in the mounting completion position and the other is output when the hopper device 180 is in the mounting completion position.

  Here, the mounting operation of the hopper device 180 and the operation of the hopper monitoring switch 230 associated therewith will be described with reference to FIG. When the hopper device 180 is installed in the housing 11, the hopper device 180 is first placed on the base portion 151. By pushing the hopper device 180 toward the guide rail 153, the protruding portion 212 is fitted into the guide rail 153, and the upward lifting and the left-right position variation are suppressed. Even if the hopper device 180 is pushed in a state of being deviated with respect to the guide rail 153, the protruding portion 212 is easily guided toward the guide rail 153 by the introduction portion 160 and the guide inclined portion 161.

  The hopper device 180 slides in the mounting direction defined by the guide rail 153 based on the pushing operation of the hopper device 180. When the hopper device 180 reaches a predetermined position, the fixture 211 that fixes the cover member 210 is first shielded by the base portion 151. By further pushing operation, the lever member 231 at the maximum projecting position and the insertion port 208 come into contact with each other. When the contact portion 232 is pushed by the edge portion of the insertion port 208, the lever member 231 rotates against the urging force of the torsion coil spring, and the protruding amount thereof decreases.

  Based on the hopper device 180 reaching the predetermined range, the hopper monitoring switch 230 (specifically, the lever member 231) is accommodated in the accommodating portion 214, and the curved surface portion 234 of the lever member 231 is the plate of the cover member 210. It will contact the surface. Thereby, the lever member 231 is arranged at the ON position, and it can be grasped that the hopper device 180 is installed. When the hopper device 180 is further pushed in, the contact surface 213 of the hopper device 180 and the stopper 165 of the lower plate 150 come into contact with each other, and further pushing operation is restricted.

  When the hopper device 180 is removed from the housing 11, the rotation of the lever member 231 is suppressed by the cover member 210 within the predetermined range. For this reason, the hopper monitoring switch 230 recognizes that the hopper device 180 is disposed within a predetermined range. When the hopper device 180 is further pulled out, the lever member 231 is separated from the cover member 210 and is rotated toward the maximum projecting position by the biasing force of the torsion coil spring. Accordingly, the lever member 231 is disposed at the OFF position, and it can be grasped that the hopper device 180 may be removed. In other words, the movement of the hopper device 180 is detected when the lever member 231 is separated from the accommodating portion 214. Thus, when the lever member 231 moves to the maximum projecting position and the movement of the hopper device 180 is detected, the protrusion 212 is maintained in a state of being fitted to the guide rail 153. That is, it is difficult to access the cover member 210 and the fixture 211 while avoiding the movement detection of the hopper device 180 by the hopper monitoring switch 230.

  Further, by pulling out the hopper device 180, the protrusion 212 is separated from the guide rail 153. Thereby, access to the fixtures 152 and 211, the cover member 210, and the hopper monitoring switch 230 becomes possible.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 11B, a plurality of horizontally long vent holes 247 are formed in a portion of the back plate 11 c of the housing 11 that faces the hopper device 180. Through these vent holes 247, the heated air in the housing 11 can be discharged to the outside. The vent hole 247 may be formed in the upper part or the lower part of the back plate 11c, or may be formed in each of the side plates 11d and 11e or the top plate 11a.

  A square hole 248 is formed above the vent hole 247, specifically at a position above the storage tank 181. Through this square hole 248, a medal replenishment passage that communicates from the outside of the housing 11 to the inside of the housing 11 can be installed. It can be realized. 5 and 6 show a state in which the square hole 248 is closed by a detachable lid 249, but the lid 249 is removed when the automatic replenishment is performed. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, a partition plate unit 250 that divides the internal space of the casing 11 in the vertical direction is provided above the hopper device 180 (substantially in the center in the height direction in the casing 11). . As described above, the area below the partition plate unit 250 is an installation area for the power supply box 170, the hopper device 180, and the like, and the area above the partition plate unit 250 is an installation area for the surface changing unit 300. Yes. Hereinafter, the partition plate unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of the partition plate unit 250.

  The partition plate unit 250 has a partition plate 251 made of a metal plate material. The partition plate 251 includes a flat plate portion 252 passed between the left side plate 11d, the right side plate 11e, and the back plate 11c, and a left bent portion 253 formed by bending the left and right ends of the flat plate portion 252 upward. And the right bent portion 254 and the rear bent portion 255 formed by bending the rear end portion of the flat plate portion 252 upward. The flat plate portion 252 is formed to be parallel to the bottom plate 11 b of the housing 11, and the upper surface thereof constitutes a support portion that supports the surface changing unit 300. Thus, if attention is paid to the function of supporting the surface changing unit 300, the “partition plate 251” may be referred to as the “support member 251”, or the “partition plate unit 250” may be referred to as the “support unit 250”. Is possible.

  Each of the bent portions 253 and 254 has a plate shape facing the side plates 11d and 11e, and is fixed to the same side plates 11d and 11e with a fixing tool such as a screw while being in contact with the side plates 11d and 11e. Has been. Similarly, the rear bent portion 255 has a plate shape facing the back plate 11c, and the plate surface is in contact with the back plate 11c. It is fixed by a fixture. Thus, by fixing the partition plate 251 to the side plates 11d and 11e and the back plate 11c, the housing 11 is reinforced and the support function of the surface changing unit 300 is made suitable.

  When attaching the surface changing unit 300 to the housing 11, the surface changing unit 300 can be easily operated by pushing it into the back side of the housing 11 in a state of being placed on the flat plate portion 252. When removing the replacement unit 300 from the housing 11, it is possible to easily perform the operation by pulling the same surface replacement unit 300 toward the front side along the flat plate portion 252.

  The partition plate unit 250 includes a plurality of lock members 260 that can be switched between a position where the removal of the surface changing unit 300 is impossible (lock position) and a position where the removal is allowed (lock release position). Each lock member 260 is slidably held by the flat plate portion 252 and protrudes above and below the flat plate portion 252 through a slit 256 formed in the flat plate portion 252. The portion of the lock member 260 that protrudes above the flat plate portion 252 constitutes a hooking portion 261 that makes it impossible to remove the surface changing unit 300 by being hooked to the surface changing unit 300. A portion of the lock member 260 that protrudes below the flat plate portion 252 constitutes a finger hooking operation portion 262 that performs a slide operation of the lock member 260. The hooking unit 261 moves to a position where the hooking operation unit 262 moves to the lock position, and the hooking unit 262 moves to a position where the hooking operation unit 262 moves to the lock release position. It will move to the position which avoids the catch with respect to. In addition, a biasing member (for example, a coil spring) that biases the lock member 260 toward a position where the lock member 260 cannot be removed is provided. It is good also as a structure which moves in order of a position.

  A long hole 265 is formed above the partition plate unit 250 (specifically, the bent portions 253 and 254) so as to penetrate the side plates 11d and 11e. The long holes 265 are covered from the inside of the casing 11 by a cap 266 provided in the casing 11. The caps 266 are integrated with the partition plate unit 250 using a fixing tool such as a screw. By attaching the cap 266, fraud due to insertion of a wire or the like is prevented.

  Furthermore, each cap 266 is also fixed to the side plates 11d and 11e, and when carrying the slot machine 10, it is easy to work by hooking the finger that has passed through the long hole 265 to the cap 266. Is possible. When the slot machine 10 is lifted by disposing the long hole 265 and the cap 266 constituting the gripping means in the slot machine 10 above the partition plate 251 (specifically, the flat plate portion 252), for example, the slot machine 10 By tilting, it is difficult to cause inconvenience that it is difficult to maintain the balance.

<Configuration of the surface changing unit 300>
Next, the surface changing unit 300 mounted inside the housing 11 will be described. 13 is a perspective view of the surface changing unit 300 as viewed obliquely from above, FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing the rear structure of the surface changing unit 300, FIG. 15 is a bottom view of the surface changing unit 300, and FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view showing the surface changing unit 300 in an exploded manner for each main component. In the following description of the surface changing unit 300, unless otherwise specified, the lower left side of FIG. 13 is the front side, the upper right side of FIG. 13 is the rear side, the upper left side of FIG. The direction such as up, down, left and right is described with the lower right side of the right side as the right side.

  The main surface changing unit 300 is mainly composed of a box-shaped inner casing 310 opened to the front door 12 side (front of the slot machine 10), and a reel device 550 disposed in the inner casing 310. The inner door 400 is attached so as to be opened to the front side with the left edge portion of the opening of the inner housing 310 (on the same side as the rotation center axis of the front door 12) as the axis. In the present embodiment, the surface changing unit 300 is configured to include almost all the main components that determine the game contents of the slot machine 10, and this surface is used when the model is changed in a game hall or the like. The model replacement can be performed by replacing the replacement unit 300 from the current model to a new model. That is, the surface changing unit 300 constitutes an exchange unit at the time of model change. Hereinafter, each component of the surface changing unit 300 will be described in detail individually.

  The configuration of the inner casing 310 that forms the outer shell of the surface changing unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 17 and 18. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the inner housing 310. The inner casing 310 is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin material (for example, ABS resin), and various configurations housed in the inner casing 310 can be visually recognized from the outside. Further, by making the inner casing 310 transparent, a gap formed between the surface changing unit 300 and the casing 11 can be visually recognized through the inner casing 310 while the surface changing unit 300 is attached to the casing 11. It becomes possible to do. This contributes to improvement in maintainability. Further, since the inner housing 310 is transparent, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal an illegal substrate or the like. It is also possible to form the inner casing 310 from a colored and opaque synthetic resin material so that the inside of the inner casing 310 is not visible. Further, in addition to using a synthetic resin material, it may be formed of wood or a metal material.

  The inner casing 310 includes a top plate portion 310a, a bottom plate portion 310b, a back plate portion 310c, a left plate portion 310d, and a right plate portion 310e, and has a box shape opened to the side facing the front door 12. ing.

  A door support fitting 315 that rotatably supports the inner door 400 is attached to the front end edge (the rotation base end side of the front door 12) of the left side plate portion 310d in the inner casing 310. The door support fitting 315 has a long shape extending from the bottom plate portion 310b to the top plate portion 310a along the front end edge of the left side plate portion 310d, and is provided with support shafts 316 and 317 spaced apart at two upper and lower portions thereof. ing. A bearing fitting 405 having bearing portions 403 and 404 into which the support shafts 316 and 317 are inserted is attached to the inner door 400. After the bearing portions 403 and 404 are arranged above the respective support shafts 316 and 317, the inner door 400 is lowered, whereby the support shafts 316 and 317 are inserted into the respective bearing portions 403 and 404. . As a result, the inner door 400 is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis connecting the support shafts 316 and 317 with respect to the inner casing 310, and the inner casing 310 is opened or closed by the rotation. It has a configuration that can.

  Here, the configuration of the inner door 400 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. The inner door 400 includes a liquid crystal display device 410 as an auxiliary effect device, a transparent front cover 413 formed so as to cover the front side of the liquid crystal display device 410, and a display control device 415 that controls the liquid crystal display device 410. , And a synthetic resin base frame 420 on which the various configurations 410, 413, and 415 are mounted.

  The base frame 420 is formed to have a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and the bearing fitting 405 described above is fixed to one side portion thereof. A display plate portion 421 to which various information related to games (for example, a payout table) is provided is provided above the base frame 420, and a liquid crystal display device is provided below the display plate portion 421 on the front side of the base frame 420. 410 is mounted.

  The liquid crystal display device 410 includes a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal driver that drives the liquid crystal panel, and has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, like the base frame 420. The width dimension of the inner casing 310 is at least equal to the distance between the side plates 310d and 310e of the inner casing 310, and most of the opening portion of the inner casing 310 is covered. A window portion 411 is formed in the lower part of the center of the liquid crystal display device 410 so that the inside of the inner housing 310, specifically, a design of a reel device 550, which will be described later, can be visually recognized (so-called donut liquid crystal). The base frame 420 is also provided with a window 422 corresponding to the window 411 of the liquid crystal display device 410. Furthermore, the front cover 413 disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 410 is transparent, so that the liquid crystal display device 410, more specifically, the visibility of various pictures displayed on the display screen 410a and the windows 411 and 422 are interposed. The liquid crystal display device 410 is protected while ensuring the visibility inside the inner casing 310. The visibility of the reel device 550 can be ensured by forming openings corresponding to the window portions 411 and 422 in the front cover 413.

  Illumination parts 423 and 424 for illuminating the design of the reel device 550 are provided on the upper edge and the lower edge of the window 422 in the base frame 420, which contributes to improving the visibility of the design of the reel device 550. doing.

  A pair of upper and lower metal fittings 426 and 427 are provided at the end of the base frame 420 on the rotating front end side, and a right metal plate 310e of the inner housing 310 has a metal fitting receiving metal corresponding to the metal fittings 426 and 427. 320 is attached. The eaves receiving bracket 320 has a long shape extending along the front edge of the right side plate portion 310e, and has eaves receiving portions 321 and 322 on which the respective eaves fittings 426 and 427 are hooked. The inner door 400 is held in a closed state with respect to the inner casing 310 by the hooks 426 and 427 and the hook receiving portions 321 and 322 being caught.

  Referring to FIG. 18 again, at the opening edge of the inner casing 310, in addition to the door support fitting 315 and the saddle receiving fitting 320 described above, the reinforcing plate 325 connecting the door support fitting 315 and the saddle receiving fitting 320 is provided. , 330 are provided. Specifically, an upper reinforcing plate 325 is disposed at the front end edge of the top plate portion 310a, and a lower reinforcing plate is disposed at the front end edge of the bottom plate portion 310b. Each of the reinforcing plates 325 and 330 is mounted in a state where the left and right end portions are connected to the metal fittings 315 and 320. As described above, the reinforcing plates 325 and 330 and the metal fittings 315 and 320 are connected to each other to form a frame shape (specifically, an annular shape), thereby improving the support rigidity of the inner door 400 and the inner casing 310. Improved rigidity.

  As shown in FIG. 18 and the like, the top plate portion 310a of the inner casing 310 has a substantially plate shape as a whole, and a through long hole 340 as a handle portion is formed on the rear side of the upper reinforcing plate 325. Has been. A plurality of ventilation holes 341 penetrating inward and outward are formed around the through long hole 340 so that heat generated in the surface changing unit 300 can be released. Further, a plurality of vertical and horizontal ribs 342 are formed in a portion of the housing 11 facing the top plate 11a so as to avoid interference with the through long holes 340 and the vent holes 341. These vertical and horizontal ribs 342 function as a reinforcing portion that increases the rigidity of the top plate portion 310a, and by subdividing the space generated between the top plate portion 310a of the surface changing unit 300 and the top plate 11a of the housing 11. It also has a fraud suppression function that suppresses the installation of fraudulent substrates.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18 and the like, a lower opening 345 penetrating inward and outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cap 266 at the lower portion of the right side plate portion 310e. The lower opening 345 prevents the cap 266 and the surface changing unit 300 from being held when the surface changing unit 300 is mounted. At the lower end edge of the lower opening 345, a protrusion 346 that is convex toward the right side plate 11e is formed. The protrusion 346 is configured to restrict the upward movement of the surface changing unit 300 by abutting against the cap 266 from below. An upper opening 347 having a substantially rectangular shape is formed above the lower opening 345. Details of the upper opening 347 will be described later. A plurality of vertical and horizontal ribs 348 are formed on the right side plate portion 310e so as to avoid both openings 345 and 347, similarly to the top plate portion 310a. These vertical and horizontal ribs 348 have the same functions as the vertical and horizontal ribs 342 described above.

  Similarly to the right side plate part 310e, the left side plate part 310d is also formed with a lower opening, a ridge part, and vertical and horizontal ribs, but these various configurations have a lower side opening 345 and a ridge part 346 on the right side plate part 310e. Since it is the same as that of the vertical and horizontal ribs 348, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the back plate portion 310c is formed with a concave portion 350 that is recessed inside the surface changing unit 300 along the outer shape of the reel device 550. In FIG. 2, the dead space generated between the reel device 550 and the back plate portion 310c, that is, behind the reel device 550 is reduced, making it difficult to install an illegal board or the like in the dead space.

  Further, a plurality of protrusions 351 projecting toward the rear bent portion 255 are formed in a portion of the back plate portion 310c facing the rear bent portion 255 of the partition plate unit 250. The protrusions 351 are respectively arranged at predetermined intervals on both sides of the above-described recess 350 and on the lower side of the recess 350. Each of the protrusions 351 has a hollow and substantially cylindrical shape, and a tip edge thereof is in contact with the plate surface of the rear bent portion 255. In this way, the protrusion 351 and the rear bent portion 255 come into contact with each other, whereby the surface replacement unit 300 is positioned in the depth direction. That is, each protrusion 441 and the rear bent portion 255 constitute a depth direction positioning means of the surface changing unit 300. In addition, each protrusion 351 is formed to have a hollow cylindrical shape, and it is difficult for the protrusion 351 to be deformed or chipped by hitting the rear bent portion 255. In addition, it is also possible to make it easy to absorb the impact at the time of contact with the rear bent portion 255 by positively deforming the protrusion 251 elastically. When making such a change, the protrusion 251 may be formed separately from the inner housing 310 (using a softer material than the inner housing 310).

  In addition, in the backplate part 310c, the rigidity of the same backplate part 310c is improved by forming the above-mentioned concave part 350, and generation | occurrence | production of curvature etc. is suppressed. That is, the displacement of the protrusion 441 is suppressed, and the function as the positioning portion of the back plate 310 is easily secured.

  As shown in FIG. 15, a through long hole 355 is formed in the bottom plate portion 310 b of the inner housing 310 so as to be biased toward the front end edge. This through long hole 355 constitutes a handle portion of the surface changing unit 300, similarly to the through long hole 340 of the top plate portion 310a. When carrying the surface changing unit 300, it is possible to easily perform the operation by passing a finger through each of the through holes 340 and 355 described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12 etc., in the state which installed the inner side housing | casing 310 (surface change unit 300) in the front-end edge of the flat plate part 252 in the partition plate 251, the penetration long hole 355 is exposed below. A retreating portion 257 that is retreated so as to be formed is formed, and when the inner casing 310 is moved on the flat plate portion 252, it is possible to perform a pushing operation with a finger passing through the through long hole 355. . Thereby, it can mount | wear without changing the surface changing unit 300, etc., and the complexity of an operation | work is suppressed.

  On the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 310b, when the hook portion 261 of each lock member 260 is in the unlocked position, the lock member passage portion 356 through which the hook portion 261 passes as the surface changing unit 300 moves. Is formed. Each lock member passage portion 356 extends along the left and right edges of the bottom plate portion 310b, and on the side facing the adjacent one of the left and right side plates 11d and 11c and on the back plate 11c side. It is open. A guide portion 357 is formed at the rear end portion of the lock member passage portion 356, that is, at the entrance portion of the lock member 260 so that the passage width gradually increases toward the rear. Accordingly, even when the position of the lock member 260 is deviated from the unlock position, the guide member 357 can easily guide the lock member 260 to the lock member passage 356.

  Further, the front end of both the lock member passage portions 356 is connected to the lock member passage portion 356, and the fitting groove 261 is fitted into the hook portion 261 when the hook portion 261 moves to the lock position. 358 is formed. After the surface changing unit 300 is mounted, the locking member 260 is moved to the lock position, whereby the hooking portion 261 is fitted in the fitting groove 358, and the removal of the surface changing unit 300 is restricted.

  On the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 310b, the movement to the mounting completion position of the surface changing unit 300 is guided to the rear side of the through long hole 355, specifically, to a position approximately in the middle of the both side plate portions 310d and 310e. A guide groove 360 is formed. In other words, the through long hole 355 and the guide groove 360 are formed on a virtual straight line extending in the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300 (specifically, the mounting direction defined by the guide groove 360 and a rail member 270 described later). Yes. In other words, the guide groove 360 is disposed at a position sandwiched between the fitting grooves 358. The partition unit 250 is provided with rail members 270 corresponding to the guide grooves 360.

  Hereinafter, the guide groove 360 and the rail member 270 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 19 is a perspective view showing the partition unit 250 and the inner casing 310, FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged view of FIG. 15 showing the relationship between the rail member 270 and the guide groove 360, and FIG. FIG. 21B is a plan view of the rail member 270. FIG.

  The guide groove 360 extends in the front-rear direction and has a concave shape that is recessed inside (upward) of the surface changing unit 300. More specifically, the guide groove 360 has a pair of side walls 361 and 362 facing each other at a predetermined interval and extending in the front-rear direction, and a bottom portion connecting the side walls 361 and 362 and facing the flat plate portion 252 of the partition plate 251. 363, and the end on the through-hole 355 side is closed by the vertical wall 364, and the opposite end of the vertical wall 364 is the rear bent portion of the partition plate 251 through the opening 365. Opened to the 255 side (rear).

  In addition, the guide groove 360 includes a rear region RE including a rear open portion (opening 365), a continuous region ME that is located in front of the rear region RE and is continuous with the rear region RE, and more than the continuous region ME. It has three different areas which are located on the front side and are continuous with the front side area FE which is continuous with the continuous area ME. More specifically, the side walls 361 and 362 are continuous with the rear facing wall portions 366 and 367 formed so as to face each other on the opening 365 side, and the rear facing wall portions 366 and 367. And continuous opposing wall portions 368 and 369 formed opposite to each other, and front-side opposing wall portions 370 and 371 that are continuous to these continuous opposing wall portions 368 and 369 and formed opposite to each other. . The rear region RE is configured by the region sandwiched between the two rear facing wall portions 366 and 367, and the continuous region ME is configured by the region sandwiched between the two continuous facing wall portions 368 and 369. A front region FE is configured by a region sandwiched between the portions 370 and 371.

  The rear facing wall portions 366 and 367 are formed so that the distance between them is constant in the longitudinal direction of the guide groove 360. More specifically, the rear facing wall portions 366 and 367 are formed so as to be parallel to each other and have a planar shape standing in the vertical direction. Similarly, the front facing walls 370 and 371 are formed so that the distance between them is constant in the longitudinal direction of the guide groove 360. More specifically, the front facing wall portions 370 and 371 are formed to be parallel to each other and have a planar shape that stands in the vertical direction. The groove width BW in the rear region RE (that is, the spacing dimension BW between the rear facing wall portions 366 and 367) is larger than the groove width FW in the front region FE (that is, the spacing dimension FW between the front facing wall portions 370 and 371). It is set large. In the continuous opposing wall parts 368 and 369 which comprise the continuous area | region ME, it forms so that the space | interval of these continuous opposing wall parts 368 and 369 may spread gradually toward back.

  In a state where the surface changing unit 300 (inner housing 310) is mounted on the housing 11, the rail member 270 is fitted inside the guide groove 360. The rail member 270 extends in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the guide groove 360, and a hole portion (not shown) in which a plurality of leg portions 271 formed on the side facing the flat plate portion 252 is formed in the flat plate portion 252. It is fixed by being caught on. The rail member 270 can also be fixed by a fixing tool such as a screw. Moreover, it is not necessary to form the rail member 270 and the partition plate 251 separately, and both can be integrally formed.

  The rail member 270 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface facing the guide groove 360 is similar to the inner peripheral surface of the guide groove 360 except for a part thereof. Therefore, the rail member 270 will be described in detail below with a focus on the relationship with the guide groove 360.

  The rail member 270 has rear vertical wall portions 276 and 277 that face the rear facing wall portions 366 and 367 with a slight gap therebetween. The first rear projections 276a and 277a and the second rear projections 276b and 277b that fill the gaps described above are arranged in parallel on the rear vertical wall portions 276 and 277 at a predetermined interval. The tip portions of the rear protrusions 276a, 277a, 276b, 277b are in contact with the rear facing wall portions 366, 367. More specifically, the protrusions 276a and 276b of the rear vertical wall portion 276 located on the left side and the protrusions 277a and 277b of the rear vertical wall portion 277 located on the right side are formed to have the same front-rear position. Has been. That is, the pitch dimension RP1 of the first rear protrusions 276a and 277a and the pitch dimension RP2 of the second rear protrusions 276b and 277b formed on the left and right sides of the rail member 270 are set to be the same as the interval dimension BW. ing.

  The rail member 270 is formed with continuous vertical wall portions 278 and 279 that are continuous with the rear vertical wall portions 276 and 277 and face the continuous opposing wall portions 368 and 369 at a predetermined interval. . Thereby, the contact of continuous opposing wall part 368,369 and continuous vertical wall part 278,279 is avoided.

  Similarly, the rail member 270 is connected to the continuous vertical wall portions 278 and 279 on the front side of the continuous vertical wall portions 278 and 279 and faces the front facing wall portions 370 and 371 with a slight gap therebetween. Wall portions 280 and 281 are formed. The front vertical wall portions 280 and 281 are respectively provided with first front protrusions 280a and 281a and second front protrusions 280b and 281b, which fill the gaps described above, at the front and rear sides of the front protrusions 280a. , 281a, 280b, 281b are in contact with the front facing wall portions 370, 371. That is, the pitch dimension FP1 of the first front protrusions 280a and 281a and the pitch dimension FP2 of the second front protrusions 280b and 281b formed on the left and right sides are set to be the same as the interval dimension FW.

  The distance dimension L1 in the rail direction between the first front protrusions 280a and 281a of the front vertical wall portions 280 and 281 and the first rear protrusions 276a and 277a of the rear vertical wall portions 276 and 277 is the same as that of the front facing wall portions 370 and 371. It is set to be slightly larger than the distance dimension L2 in the rail direction between the rear end edge and the front end edges of the rear facing wall portions 366, 367. For this reason, when the surface changing unit 300 is mounted, the position variation on the back side is first suppressed, and then the position variation on the near side is suppressed. In this way, by setting a slight deviation in the timing at which the positional variation is suppressed, it is difficult to cause gripping due to the pressing of the surface changing unit 300. The projections 276a, 277a, 276b, 277b, 280a, 281a, 280b, and 281b described in detail above are omitted, and the rear facing wall portions 366 and 367, the rear vertical wall portions 276 and 277, and the front facing wall portion 370 are omitted. , 371 and the front vertical wall portions 280, 281 may be in direct contact with each other.

  Further, the rail member 270 is formed with a top portion 285 that faces the bottom portion 363 of the guide groove 360 with a slight gap therebetween. The top portion 285 connects the left and right vertical wall portions 276 to 281 described above, and constitutes the outer peripheral portion of the rail member 270 together with the vertical wall portions 276 to 281. The top portion 285 is formed so as to incline downward toward the front. That is, it is formed so that the height dimension from the flat plate part 272 becomes smaller toward the front end. Similarly, the bottom portion 363 is inclined so that the depth dimension increases from the front to the rear. This makes it easy to avoid catching when the rail member 270 is inserted into the guide groove 360.

  In all the sections until the surface changing unit 300 reaches the mounting completion position, the first regulation section that allows the positional variation of the surface changing unit 300 and the positional variation of the surface changing unit 300 are suppressed, and the mounting direction is one direction. And a second restriction section defined in the above. Here, based on these regulation sections and the positional relationship between the surface changing unit 300 and the support unit 250, an operation for mounting the surface changing unit 300 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between the partition plate unit 250 and the surface changing unit 300. When the surface changing unit 300 is mounted, FIG. 22 (a) → FIG. 22 (b) → FIG. ) → FIG. 22 (d), the positional relationship between the partition plate unit 250 and the surface changing unit 300 changes.

  In order to mount the surface changing unit 300 from the state where the surface changing unit 300 is outside the housing 11, first the surface changing unit 300 is placed on the flat plate portion 252 of the partition plate unit 250. Then, the front vertical wall portions 280 and 281 of the rail member 270 are pushed into the rear region RE of the guide groove 360 as shown in FIG. It reaches the state reached. In this state, vertical and horizontal movement spaces are secured between the rail member 270 and the guide groove 360. That is, variation in the mounting track of the surface changing unit 300 is allowed. For this reason, since the rail member 270 and the guide groove 360 can be used, the inconvenience that the pushing operation of the surface changing unit 300 is hindered is less likely to occur.

  When the surface changing unit 300 is further pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 22A, the front vertical wall portions 280 and 281 reach the continuous region ME of the guide groove 360 (see FIG. 22B). In the continuous region ME, when the rail member 270 and the continuous opposing wall portions 368 and 369 come into contact with each other, the surface changing unit 300 moves along the inclination of the continuous opposing wall portions 368 and 369, thereby changing the surface. Variations in the mounting track of the unit 300 are gradually suppressed. As described above, in consideration of the mounting workability of the surface changing unit 300, the first restriction section is configured by a section that facilitates the positional variation of the surface changing unit 300.

  As the front vertical wall portions 280 and 281 reach the front region FE of the guide groove 360, the first front protrusions 280a and 281a and the front facing wall portions 370 and 371 come into contact with each other. As a result, the occurrence of positional variations in front of the housing 11 of the surface changing unit 300 is avoided. When the surface changing unit 300 is further pushed in, the first rear protrusions 276a and 277a and the rear facing wall portions 366 and 367 come into contact with each other as shown in FIG. Positional variation is suppressed. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference of the mounting | wearing track | orbit of the surface changing unit 300 will be avoided. As described above, the second restriction section is configured by the section that suppresses the positional variation of the surface changing unit 300 so that the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300 is defined as one direction.

  When the surface changing unit 300 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 22C, the surface changing unit 300 is guided to the mounting completion position, and in synchronization with the arrival of the mounting completion position, the second front side The protrusions 280b and 281b abut against the front facing wall portions 370 and 371, and the second rear protrusions 276b and 277b abut against the rear facing wall portions 366 and 367. As a result, all the protrusions 276a, 277a, 276b, 277b, 280a, 281a, 280b, and 281b formed on the rail member 270 come into contact with the side walls 361 and 362, and the position change unit 300 is displaced in the left-right direction. Is preferably avoided.

<Description of the fixing means 450>
The slot machine 10 shown in the present embodiment includes a fixing unit 450 that fixes the surface changing unit 300 to the housing 11 after the surface changing unit 300 is arranged in the mounting completion position on the housing 11. This is one of the characteristics. Hereinafter, the fixing means 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 23 is an exploded perspective view showing the fixing means 450 disassembled for each main component, FIG. 24A is a partial sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 3, and FIG. 24B is a line BB in FIG. FIG. 25A is a partial sectional view, FIG. 25A is a perspective view of the fixing unit 450 as viewed from above, and FIG. 25B is an exploded perspective view of the fixing unit 450 as viewed from above.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the fixing means 450 is attached so as to straddle the top plate portion 310 a of the surface changing unit 300 and the top plate 11 a of the housing 11. Further, the fixing means 450 is arranged on the right side of the left lock member 260 and on the left side of the right lock member 260 in the left-right direction, that is, between the lock members 260 (specifically, at an intermediate position). Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 23 and the like, the fixing means 450 includes an insertion member 460 that is inserted through the top plate portion 310a of the surface changing unit 300 and the top plate 11a of the housing 11, and a regulating member that regulates removal of the insertion member 460. 500.

  The insertion member 460 includes a flat base plate portion 470 that faces the inner surface of the top plate portion 310a, and a main body portion 480 that stands up from the base plate portion 470 and is inserted through the top plate portion 310a and the top plate 11a. ing. The main body 480 is opposed to the first opposing wall portions 481 and 482 facing the sliding direction of the surface changing unit 300 with a predetermined interval, and opposed to the first opposing wall portions 481 and 482 with a predetermined interval in the direction orthogonal to the sliding direction. It has the 2nd opposing wall part 483,484 connecting the opposing wall part 481,482, and it is formed so that it may form the cylinder shape extended up and down as a whole.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and the like, a substantially rectangular unit-side insertion hole 343 corresponding to the main body 480 of the insertion member 460 is provided in front of the through long hole 340 in the top plate portion 310a of the surface changing unit 300. Is formed. The upper reinforcing plate 325 is also formed with a substantially rectangular plate-side insertion hole 326 corresponding to the main body 480, and the unit-side insertion hole 343 and the plate-side insertion hole 326 are in communication with each other. . A bent piece 327 is formed at the rear end edge of the plate-side insertion hole 326 in the upper reinforcing plate 325 by bending toward the unit-side insertion hole 343. The bent piece 327 faces the rear first opposing wall portion 482 and covers the boundary between the upper reinforcing plate 325 and the top plate portion 310a. When the insertion member 460 is inserted, by pushing the insertion member 460 along the bent piece 327, the inconvenience that the insertion member 460 and the upper reinforcing plate 325 can be made difficult to occur.

  A bottomed recess 138 into which the main body 480 is fitted is formed in the top plate 11a of the housing 11 (see FIG. 24). The upper plate 140 attached to the top plate 11 is independently formed with housing side insertion holes 141 and 142 communicating with the recess 138. Specifically, the upper plate 140 is provided with a central plate portion 143 so that the open portion of the recess 138 is divided into right and left. That is, the housing side insertion holes 141 and 142 are formed on both the left and right sides with the central plate portion 143 interposed therebetween.

  In the insertion member 460, cutout portions 486 and 487 that avoid interference with the central plate portion 143 of the upper plate 140 are formed in the first opposing wall portions 481 and 482 constituting the main body portion 480, and these cutout portions 486 are formed. 487 are in contact with the lower plate surface 143a of the central plate portion 143 from below. Specifically, it is in contact with the base portion of the central plate portion 143. The insertion member 460 is formed with third opposing wall portions 488 and 489 that connect the first opposing wall portions 481 and 482 and abut against the left and right edges of the central plate portion 143 from below. . A space is formed between the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489, and a central pressing portion 491 that comes into contact with the region including the central portion of the central plate portion 143 from below is provided in the space. . The center pressing portion 491 is formed by integrally forming a bottom plate portion 492 and a plurality of ribs 493 at the end opposite to the center plate portion 143 in the third opposing wall portions 488, 489. It is connected. The bottom plate portion 492 has a plate shape parallel to the base plate portion 470 and is continuous with both first opposing wall portions 481 and 482. Thereby, the rigidity of the main-body part 480 is improved, and it is suppressing that the 1st opposing wall part 481,482 is deform | transforming into the side which mutually approaches.

  When the insertion member 460 is inserted, the notch portions 486, 487 and the like and the central plate portion 143 come into contact with each other, whereby further pressing is restricted. Further, the central plate part 143 is preferably displaced (for example, deformed) downward by contacting the notch parts 486, 487 and the like at a plurality of locations of the base part, the edge part, and the central part. Is suppressed.

  An opening 471 is formed in the base plate portion 470 of the insertion member 460 so as to expose at least a portion including the bottom plate portion 310b, and the restriction member 500 is fitted into the opening 471. A combined base portion 501 is provided. The fitting base portion 501 has a plate-like shape facing the bottom plate portion 492 of the insertion member 460, and in a state where the fitting base portion 501 is fitted in the opening 471, a plate surface 501a on the opposite side of the bottom plate portion 492 in the fitting base portion 501. Are formed on the same virtual plane together with the plate surface 470a opposite to the top plate 11a in the base plate portion 470. That is, the protrusion of the fitting base portion 501 from the opening 471 is suppressed.

  The restriction member 500 is provided with a pair of locking portions 503 and 504 that are inserted into the main body portion 480 of the insertion member 460 and hooked on the central plate portion 143. These locking portions 503 and 504 are arranged corresponding to the edge portions on both sides of the central plate portion 143. Specifically, it is arranged on both the left and right sides with the central plate portion 143 interposed therebetween. The insertion member 460 is formed with guide passage portions 494 and 495 that are continuous with the opening 471 and guide the locking portions 503 and 504 to the central plate portion 143. Specifically, partition wall portions 496 and 497 disposed between the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489 and the second opposing wall portions 483 and 484 and formed to face the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489, Guide passage portions 494 and 495 are constituted by a region sandwiched between the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489. Similarly to the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489, the partition wall portions 496 and 497 are also connected to the first opposing wall portions 481 and 482. Thereby, the deformation of the partition wall portions 496 and 497 itself is suppressed, and the rigidity of the insertion member 460 is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 24A and the like, both locking portions 503 and 504 of the regulating member 500 have substantially plate-like arm portions 506 and 507 standing from the fitting base portion 501, and these both arms. The plate surfaces of the portions 506 and 507 are opposed to the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489 and the partition wall portions 496 and 497, respectively. The arm portions 506 and 507 are formed so as to facilitate bending deformation (elastic deformation) in a predetermined direction. Specifically, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) is set to be smaller than the width dimension, that is, the length dimension along the edge of the central plate part 143, and the third opposing wall parts 488 and 489 side. Further, the bending deformation toward the partition wall portions 496 and 497 is facilitated. Reinforcing ribs 508 and 509 for suppressing excessive deformation of the arm portions 506 and 507 are integrally formed on the side of the arm portions 506 and 507 facing the partition wall portions 496 and 497.

  The arm portions 506 and 507 extend beyond the central plate portion 143 into the concave portion 138 of the top plate 11a, and on the tip side thereof, the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489 are formed from the inner surfaces of the arm portions 506 and 507. Locking claw portions 511 and 512 projecting to the side, that is, the central plate portion 143 side are integrally formed. The locking claw portions 511 and 512 have locking surfaces 513 and 514 facing the upper plate surface 143 b side of the central plate portion 143. When the locking surfaces 513 and 514 come into contact with the upper plate surface 143b, the locking portions 503 and 504 are hooked with respect to the central plate portion 143, and the upper plate 140 (specifically, the central plate portion 143) is restricted with the insertion member 460. The state is sandwiched between the members 500.

  In addition, the locking portions 503 and 504 are formed with first guide portions 503a and 504a that bend the locking portions 503 and 504 toward the side away from each other as the regulating member 500 moves to the mounting completion position. Yes. The first guide portions 503a and 504a are continuous to the arm portions 506 and 507 and the locking claw portions 511 and 512, and have a planar shape inclined from the distal end side to the root side of the locking portions 503 and 504. Yes. Further, on the base side of the third opposing wall portions 488, 489, the second guide portions 488a that guide the respective locking portions 503, 504 to the guide passage portions 494, 495 by contacting the first guide portions 503a, 504a. , 489a are formed. The second guide portions 488a and 489a have a planar shape that is inclined so as to widen the guide passage portions 494 and 495 toward the inlet portion. Note that the guide passage portions 494 and 495 have the locking portions 503 and 504 even when the arm portions 506 and 507 are bent and deformed by the first guide portions 503a and 504a and the second guide portions 488a and 489a. Is allowed to pass through.

  Here, a configuration relating to removal of the regulating member 500 will be described. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, one locking portion 503 (left locking portion) is referred to as a “first locking portion 503”, and the other locking portion 504 (right locking portion) is referred to as a “second locking portion 504”. .

  The fitting base portion 501 of the restricting member 500 includes a first base portion 521 having a first locking portion 503 that is divided into two in the direction in which the locking portions 503 and 504 are arranged in parallel (specifically, the left-right direction), and the first base portion. A second base portion 522 having a second locking portion 504 that is spaced apart from 521 and a connecting base portion 523 that connects both the base portions 521 and 522 are provided. Each base portion 521, 522 has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the front-rear direction, and the long side portions 521a, 522a of the base portions 521, 522 face each other. The connecting base portion 523 connects the central portions of the long side portions 521a and 522a, and has a long shape extending over both the base portions 521 and 522. In the connection base part 523, the plate thickness dimension is further reduced so that the length dimension (width dimension) along the long side parts 521a and 522a is smaller than the length dimension of the long side parts 521a and 522a. The base portions 521 and 522 are formed to be smaller than the plate thickness. Thereby, destruction (for example, cutting | disconnection) of the connection base part 523 is facilitated compared with destruction of the base parts 521 and 522. Further, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting base portion 523 and the bottom plate portion 492 of the insertion member 460 by reducing the plate thickness.

  In the restriction member 500, in addition to the connection base portion 523, a plurality of (two in this embodiment) connection portions 526 and 527 bridged to the first base portion 521 and the second base portion 522 are provided. Yes. The connecting portions 526 and 527 connect the base portions 521 and 522 on both sides of the connecting base portion 523. Specifically, they are arranged on the near side and the far side of the connection base portion 523 in the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300, respectively. Each of the connecting portions 526 and 527 includes first rising portions 531 and 532 that stand from the first base portion 521 to the opposite side (lower side) with respect to the first locking portion 503, and the second base portion 522 and the second engagement portion. Second standing portions 533 and 534 that stand on the opposite side (lower side) with respect to the stop portion 504, and long plate portions 535 and 536 that connect the first standing portions 531 and 532 and the second standing portions 533 and 534, It is constituted by. The long plate portions 535 and 536 are formed so as to be parallel to the connection base portion 523, and the length dimension (width dimension) along the long side portions 521a and 522a is the length dimension of the long side portions 521a and 522a. It is set to be smaller. Thereby, destruction (cutting) of the long plate portions 535 and 536 is facilitated.

  If attention is paid to the fact that the long plate portions 535 and 536 as the destruction targets (easy to break portions) are offset below the connection base portion 523, the connection portions 526 and 527 are referred to as “offset portions 526 and 527”. Can also be referred to.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the regulating member 500 is made of polycarbonate resin, and the insertion member 460 is made of POM (polyoxymethylene). That is, the insertion member 460 is formed of a synthetic resin material having a strength higher than that of the restriction member 500. In other words, by forming the regulating member 500 with a synthetic resin material having a lower strength than the insertion member 460, the above-described connection base portion 523 and the connection portions 526 and 527 can be easily cut.

  The first upright portions 531 and 532 are arranged along the long side portion 521 a of the first base portion 521. Similarly, the second upright portions 533 and 534 are arranged along the long side portion 522a of the second base portion 522. In the first base portion 521, an inclined surface 538 is formed on the back side of the first upright portions 531 and 532 along the long side portion 521a. The inclined surface 538 is formed so that a gap with the bottom plate portion 492 of the insertion member 460 gradually increases from the base portion side of the first locking portion 503 toward the connection base portion 523 side.

  Similarly, in the 2nd base part 522, the inclined surface 539 is formed in the back side of the 2nd standing part 533,534 along the long side part 522a. The inclined surface 539 is formed such that a gap with the bottom plate portion 492 of the insertion member 460 gradually increases from the base portion side of the second locking portion 504 toward the connection base portion 523 side.

  Here, the mounting operation of the fixing means 450 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (1) is a perspective view showing how the fixing means 450 is attached, and FIG. 26 (2) is a partial cross-sectional view showing how the fixing means 450 is attached. The attaching operation of the fixing means 450 is performed in the order of FIG. 26 (a) → FIG. 26 (b) → FIG. 26 (c).

  After the surface changing unit 300 is arranged in the housing 11 in the above-described procedure, the removal of the surface changing unit 300 is regulated using the fixing means 450. First, the insertion member 460 and the regulating member 500 are combined to integrate them. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), in a state where the insertion member 460 and the restriction member 500 are separately prepared, the locking portions 503 and 504 of the restriction member 500 are guided through the guide passage of the insertion member 460. Insert into the parts 494,495. When the first guide portions 503a and 504a of the regulating member 500 and the second guide portions 488a and 489a of the insertion member 460 come into contact with each other, the arm portions 506 and 507 are bent and deformed. The locking portions 503 and 504 return to the original state by their own elastic force by passing through the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489, and the locking surfaces 513 and 514 of the locking claws 511 and 512 and the third The opposing edge portions 488 and 489 face each other with a predetermined distance (about the plate thickness of the central plate portion 143) (see FIG. 26B).

  Next, the integrated fixing means 450 is inserted into the unit side insertion hole 343 of the surface changing unit 300 and pushed toward the concave portion 138 of the housing 11. By such pushing operation, the first guide portions 503a and 504a of the locking portions 503 and 504 hit the lower plate surface 143a of the central plate portion 143, and the arm portions 506 and 507 are bent and deformed. As the arm portions 506 and 507 are bent and deformed in this way, the locking claw portions 511 and 512 move beyond the central plate portion 143 and are accommodated in the concave portion 138 of the housing 11. In synchronization with this, the respective locking portions 503 and 504 are restored to their original states by their own elastic force, and the locking surfaces 513 and 514 are in contact with the central plate portion 143. Thereby, the removal of the fixing means 450 is restricted, and the fixing of the surface changing unit 300 and the housing 11 is completed (see FIG. 26C).

  In the above description of the work, the insertion member 460 and the regulating member 500 are integrated before the fixing means 450 is attached, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it is also possible to insert the restricting member 500 after inserting the insertion member 460 first.

  Thus, in the state where the surface changing unit 300 is fixed, even if a load is applied to the surface changing unit 300 in the removal direction, the load is hardly transmitted to the regulating member 500. Yes. Specifically, the rear first opposing wall 482 in the insertion member 460 hits the bent piece 327 of the upper reinforcing plate 325, and the front first opposing wall 481 is the bent parts 144, 145 of the upper plate 140. It hits. Thereby, the load mentioned above will be distributed. In such a case, the restricting member 500 moves forward as the insertion member 460 moves forward. However, in the restricting member 500, the engaging surfaces 513 and 514 merely slide on the upper plate surface 143b of the central plate portion 143, and the load on the restricting member 500 is avoided. That is, the restriction member 500 is protected by the insertion member 460.

  Next, the removal work of the fixing means 450 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 (1) and FIG. 28 (1) are perspective views showing the state of removal, and FIG. 27 (2) and FIG. 28 (2) are partial cross-sectional views showing the state of removal. The removal work of the fixing means 450 is performed in the order of FIG. 27 (a) → FIG. 27 (b) → FIG. 27 (c) → FIG. 28 (d) → FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, in the state where the housing 11 and the surface changing unit 300 are integrated by the fixing means 450, access to the locking portions 503 and 504 of the regulating member 500 is inserted into the insertion member 460. It is obstructed by etc. The arm portions 506 and 507 of the regulating member 500 are configured to bend and deform by the guide portions 488a, 489a, 503a, and 504a when moving in the insertion direction. It is hard to occur.

  Therefore, first, as shown in FIG. 27B, the connection base portion 523 and the connection portions 526 and 527 of the regulating member 500 are cut using a tool such as a nipper. Specifically, both root portions of the connection base portion 523 are cut, and both root portions of the long plate portions 535 and 536 are cut. Thereby, the connection between the first base portion 521 and the second base portion 522 is released.

  Next, as shown in FIG.27 (c), each piece 500a, 500b of the division | segmentation regulating member 500 will rotate by pushing each standing part 531-534 toward inner side. Specifically, the base portions 521 and 522 are rotated to the side where the distance between the inclined surfaces 538 and 539 of the restricting member 500 and the bottom plate portion 492 of the insertion member 460 is reduced, and the locking portions 503 and 504 follow the rotation. It will turn to the side where the hook between the latching claw parts 511 and 512 and the central plate part 143 decreases. In such a case, the second guide portions 488a and 489a of the third opposing wall portions 488 and 489 ensure the operation space of the locking portions 503 and 504 (specifically, the arm portions 506 and 507), thereby enabling smooth operation. It is possible. When the locking portions 503 and 504 are rotated, the distal end portions of the locking portions 503 and 504 (arm portions 506 and 507) approach the partition wall portions 496 and 497. Incidentally, in the partition wall portions 496 and 497, step portions 496a and 497a which are lower than the base side region are formed in the region ahead of the region facing the second opposing wall portions 483 and 484. The operating space of the locking portions 503 and 504 is expanded by these step portions 496a and 497a. As a result, the inconvenience that rotation of the locking portions 503 and 504 is hindered by the partition wall portions 496 and 497 is less likely to occur.

  After the pieces 500a and 500b of the divided regulating member 500 are tilted to the position where the rotation stops, the removal of the regulating member 500 is completed by pulling out the standing portions 531 to 534 and the like with the fingers ( (See FIG. 28 (d)).

  After removing the regulating member 500, the insertion member 460 is pulled out, so that the surface changing unit 300 can be removed as shown in FIG.

  In the above description of the work, the insertion member 460 is removed after the restriction member 500 is removed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 27C, after the pieces 500a and 500b of the divided regulating member 500 are rotated, the fixing means 450 (the regulating member 500 and the insertion member 460) can be removed together. It is.

  Here, the relationship between the bottom plate portion 492 of the insertion member 460 and the connection base portion 523 of the restriction member 500 will be supplementarily described. A central opening 499 is provided in a portion of the bottom plate portion 492 facing the connection base portion 523 of the regulating member 500. The central opening 499 forms an operating region through which the cut end of the connection base portion 523 passes when the pieces 500a and 500b of the regulating member 500 are rotated. More specifically, when the connection base portion 523 is cut at a position away from the root portion of the connection base portion 523, the remaining margin of the connection base portion 523 increases. In such a case, the cut end of the connection base portion 523 may hit the insertion member 460, and it may be difficult to sufficiently rotate.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, by forming the central opening 499, when the remaining allowance of the connection base portion 523 is large, the end portion on the cut side enters the central opening 499, so that the rotation operation is performed. Can be secured. Thereby, the area | region which can be cut | disconnected in the connection base part 523 can be expanded, and it becomes possible to suppress complication of a cutting operation | work.

<Configuration of Reel Device 550>
The various structures accommodated in the inner housing 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17 again.

  A reel device 550 is provided at the bottom of the inner casing 310. The reel device 550 is attached to a plurality of attachment portions 377 and 378 formed in the inner casing 310 using a fixing tool such as a screw.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the reel device 550 includes a case member 551 made of synthetic resin that is opened forward, and reel plates 552 to 554 made of synthetic resin that are accommodated in the case member 551 (the left reel plate 552, Reel plate 553, right reel plate 554), and three reels 555-557 (left reel 555, middle reel 556, right reel 557) of left, middle, and right attached to each reel plate 552-554. ing.

  In the case member 551, a support fixing portion 558 that protrudes outward is provided at the front upper corners of both side surfaces, and a mounting hole 559 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the approximate center of the front surface of the support fixing portion 558. Has been. Further, in the case member 551, a support fixing portion 560 that protrudes outward is provided at the front lower corners of both side surfaces, and a mounting hole 561 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed at the approximate center of the front surface. Yes. These attachment holes 559 and 561 constitute attachment means for attaching the reel device 550 to the inner casing 310.

  Since the configuration of each of the reels 555 to 557 is well known, detailed illustration is omitted here and the configuration is briefly described. Each of the reels 555 to 557 includes a cylindrical skeleton member that forms a cylindrical cage, and a belt-like belt wound around the outer periphery thereof. On the outer peripheral surface of the belt, a number of symbols as identification information are printed at equal intervals (for example, 21 symbols). A stepping motor as a drive source is provided at the center of each of the reels 555 to 557, and each of the reels 555 to 557 is rotated individually by driving the stepping motor.

  The reel plates 552 to 554 have a plate shape that stands vertically and extends back and forth, and the above-described stepping motor is fixed to the approximate center of the reel plates 552 to 554. The reels 555 to 557 are rotatably supported on the right side of the reel plates 552 to 554. In addition, when the upper and lower ends of the reel plates 552 to 554 are fixed to the case member 551 by fasteners such as screws, a part of each reel 555 to 557 appears from the front opening portion of the case member 551. . The front side portions of the reel plates 552 to 554 are configured in a shape corresponding to the protruding portions of the reels 555 to 557 from the case member 551.

  Further, a plate-shaped shielding member 562 formed so as to close the exposed portion of the right reel 557 from the right side is fixed to the right edge of the front opening portion of the case member 551 by a fastener such as a screw.

  The reel device 550 is provided with a reel index sensor (rotational position detection sensor) for detecting the rotational position of each of the reels 555 to 557 as another configuration. Further, a backlight (rear light emitting means) made of a fluorescent lamp or the like is provided on the inner peripheral side of each reel 555 to 557, and each symbol attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel is brighter than the rear by this backlight. Illuminated. By the light emission of the backlight, it is possible to improve the visibility of each symbol attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel and to diversify the auxiliary effects in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the reel plates 552 to 554 and the shielding member 562 can suppress the inside of the case member 551 from being seen from the outside. That is, the light from the backlight can be prevented from leaking outside the reel device 550.

<Configuration of main controller unit 600>
Next, the main controller 610 housed in the inner casing 310 together with the reel device 550 and the configuration (main controller unit 600) associated therewith will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 is a perspective view of the main controller unit 600 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the main controller unit 600 disassembled for each main component.

  As shown in FIG. 5 and the like, the main control device 610 is disposed above the reel device 550 so as to be biased toward the top plate portion 310a, and the top control portion 310a and the back of the inner housing 310 are interposed via the pedestal unit 710. It is fixed to the plate part 310c. The main controller 610 and the pedestal unit 710 constitute a main controller unit 600.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (an exploded perspective view of the main control device 610), the main control device 610 has a long plate-like main control board 620 for performing various controls relating to games and the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the main control board 620 ( Specifically, a substantially box-shaped substrate box 630 extending in the left-right direction) is provided, and the main control substrate 620 is accommodated in the internal space of the substrate box 630.

  The pedestal unit 710 includes a holding member 740 that detachably holds the main control device 610 (specifically, the board box 630), and a pedestal member 720 that rotatably supports the holding member 740.

  As shown in FIG. 30 and the like, the pedestal member 720 is made of a metal plate material, and is integrated with the inner casing 310 by a plurality of fixing tools 721 screwed from the outside of the inner casing 310. More specifically, the base member 720 is formed with a flat plate portion 722 that is parallel to the back plate portion 310 c of the inner housing 310. The flat plate portion 722 has a long plate shape that extends in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the main control board 620, specifically in the left-right direction, and has a top plate portion of the inner casing 310 at its upper edge (upper long side). An upper bent portion 724 is formed so as to be parallel to 310a. The pedestal member 720 is fixed to the inner casing 310 with the flat plate portion 722 in contact with the back plate portion 310c and the upper bent portion 724 in contact with the top plate portion 310a. More specifically, the flat plate portion 722 is formed with a screw hole 722a communicating with the round hole 352 formed in the back plate portion 310c, and the upper bent portion 724 is formed with a round hole formed in the top plate portion 310a. A screw hole 724 a communicating with 344 is formed. The inner casing 310 and the base member 720 are integrated by screwing a fixing tool 721 such as a screw into the screw holes 722a and 724a from the outer side of the inner casing 310.

  A peripheral wall portion 723 is formed along the outer peripheral edge of almost the entire outer peripheral edge of the flat plate portion 722. Specifically, a lower bent portion 725 that faces the upper bent portion 724 is formed at the lower end edge of the flat plate portion 722, and a left bent portion that faces the left plate portion 310d is formed on the left edge portion of the flat plate portion 722. 726 is formed to be bent on the same side as the upper bent portion 724, and a right bent portion 727 opposite to the right plate portion 310 e is formed on the same side as the left bent portion 726 on the right edge of the flat plate portion 722. It is formed by bending. These bent portions 724 to 727 constitute the peripheral wall portion 723 that surrounds the flat plate portion 722. That is, the pedestal member 720 has a substantially box-like shape opened to the front of the slot machine 10.

  In the base member 720, the holding member 740 is disposed in a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 723 (see FIGS. 29 and 30). The holding member 740 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the main controller 610 (for example, the main control board 620) and the like can be visually recognized through itself. As shown in FIG. 31 (perspective view of the holding member 740), the holding member 740 has a counter plate portion 741 that faces the flat plate portion 722 of the base member 720. A bulging portion 742 that bulges from the counter plate portion 741 to the side opposite to the flat plate portion 722 is provided at the lower end portion of the counter plate portion 741. The bulging portion 742 is formed along the lower bent portion 725 of the pedestal member 720, and attachment portions 743 and 744 for the pedestal member 720 are provided on the left and right sides thereof.

  Here, the structure regarding attachment of the holding member 740 and the base member 720 is demonstrated easily. Support portions 728 and 729 for supporting the holding member 740 are integrally formed with the left bent portion 726 and the right bent portion 727 of the base member 720. The support portions 728 and 729 are arranged at positions biased toward the lower bent portion 725, and extend from the bent portions 726 and 727 to the side away from the flat plate portion 722 of the base member 720. The mounting portions 743 and 744 of the holding member 740 described above are disposed corresponding to the support portions 728 and 729 and sandwich the support portions 728 and 729 from both sides in the plate thickness direction of the support portions 728 and 729. It is formed as follows.

  The support portions 728 and 729 are formed with through holes 731 and 732 penetrating in the thickness direction of the support portion 728 and 729, more specifically in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) of the main control board 620. Are formed with communication holes 745 and 746 that are continuous with the through holes 731 and 732. By inserting the shaft pins 748 and 749 through the through holes 731 and 732 and the communication holes 745 and 746, the holding member 740 is rotatably supported by the base member 720. And the base part 720 and the holding member 740 are integrated by fixing the front-end | tip part of the shaft pins 748 and 749 with respect to the attaching parts 743 and 744.

  Side wall portions 751 and 752 that stand from the opposing plate portion 741 and oppose the left and right bent portions 726 and 727 of the pedestal member 720 are formed at edges on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the opposing plate portion 741 of the holding member 740. ing. The amount of standing of the side wall portions 751 and 752 from the opposing plate portion 741 is set to be equal to the amount of standing of the bent portions 726 and 727 from the flat plate portion 722.

  On the left side wall 751 (hereinafter referred to as the left side wall 751), a protrusion 753 is formed that protrudes toward the left bent portion 726 and contacts the leading edge of the left bent portion 726. Similarly, a right side wall portion 752 (hereinafter, referred to as a right side wall portion 752) is formed with a protrusion 754 that protrudes toward the right bent portion 727 and abuts on the leading edge of the right bent portion 727. . These protrusions 753 and 754 come into contact with the tip edge portions of the bent portions 726 and 727, so that the rotation of the holding member 740 with respect to the base member 720 is restricted.

  The main control device 610 is disposed in the region surrounded by the side wall portions 751 and 752 and the bulging portion 742 described in detail above. Hereinafter, a specific configuration of main controller 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the main control device 610 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the main control device 610 viewed from the back side. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view showing the main control device 610 disassembled for each main component. In the following description of the main controller 610, unless otherwise specified, the lower right side is the front side, the upper left side is the rear side, the lower left side is the left side, and the upper right side is the right side. Describe the direction of etc.

  The main control board 620 constituting the main control device 610 has a long plate shape as described above, and the MPU 621 that controls the main control, the input / output driver IC chip, the latch IC chip, the capacitor, the resistor, and the like And various connectors 622 to 624 are mounted. Further, the main control board 620 includes a reset switch 625 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, a setting key insertion unit 626 for a hole manager and the like to adjust the appearance of medals. In this slot machine 10, the winning probabilities for a predetermined combination in the winning / losing lottery are set in advance in a plurality of stages. In this way, the winning probability can be set to a predetermined stage among the plurality of stages.

  In the main control board 620, various elements such as the MPU 621 and the connectors 622 to 624 are all mounted on the same plate surface, and are soldered on the opposite plate surface except for the MPU 621. That is, in the main control board 620, one plate surface is an element mounting surface 620a and the other plate surface is a solder surface 620b. The main control board 620 is disposed so that the solder surface 620b faces the counter plate portion 741 side of the holding member 740. When the holding member 740 is disposed at the mounting completion position, the element mounting surface 620a is the slot. It is configured to face the front of the machine 10. The solder surface 620b is a surface provided with soldering portions of various elements mounted on the element mounting surface 620a, but a circuit pattern may be formed on the solder surface 620b.

  The board box 630 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material (specifically, polycarbonate resin), and has a function as an encapsulating means for housing the main control board 620. That is, while the main control board 620 is protected by the board box 630, the visibility of the main control board 620 is ensured. The board box 630 includes a front-side structure 631 that covers the main control board 620 from the element mounting surface 620a side, and a back-side structure 632 that covers the main control board 620 from the solder surface 620b side, that is, from the opposing plate portion 741 side of the holding member 740. Are combined.

  The front-side structure 631 has a front-side facing wall portion 635 facing the element mounting surface 620a, and the main control board 620 is fixed to the front-side facing wall portion 635 by a fixing tool 628 such as a screw. Connector openings 636 to 638 corresponding to the connectors 622 to 624 on a one-to-one basis are formed on the front-side facing wall 635, and the connectors 622 to 624 are connected via the connector openings 636 to 638. Is protruded to the outside of the substrate box 630. The connectors 622 and 623 are biased to the rotation center axis CL side of the holding member 740 and suppress an increase in a margin of wiring generated as the main controller 610 rotates. . In particular, in the connector 622, the arrangement direction of the pins is set to be the same direction as the rotation center axis CL, which contributes to the shortening of the wiring described above. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 33, the connector 622 has a connector restricting member 629 for restricting the separation of both connectors in a state where a connector (not shown) corresponding to the connector 622 is connected. Is provided. This makes it difficult for the connector to be disconnected due to the rotation of the main controller 610. Further, the connector restricting member 629 is configured such that a trace (for example, a destruction trace) remains based on the removal of the connector 622. Thereby, it is possible to remove the connector 622 and prevent an unauthorized signal from being input instead, and to easily detect the unauthorized operation even if such an unauthorized act is performed.

  Further, on the front-side facing wall portion 635 of the front-side structure 631, a switch opening 639 and a setting key opening 640 that expose the reset switch 625 and the setting key insertion portion 626 to the outside of the board box 630, and the respective openings. Opening cover pieces 641 and 642 are provided to cover the portions 639 and 640 so that they can be opened and closed. By opening the opening cover pieces 641 and 642 and exposing the openings 639 and 640, the reset switch 625 and the setting key insertion part 626 can be accessed through the openings 639 and 640. It should be noted that the objects to be provided with the reset switch 625 and the setting key insertion portion 626 are not limited to the main controller 610. For example, the reset switch 625 and the setting key insertion portion 626 can be provided in the power supply box 170 or the like.

  A front peripheral wall portion 645 that stands on the main control board 620 side and surrounds the main control board 620 is integrally formed on the entire outer peripheral edge of the front side facing wall 635 of the front side structure 631. The front-side peripheral wall portions 645 are arranged on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the main control board 620 and are arranged on both sides in the short-side direction of the main control board 620 and a pair of first front-side peripheral wall portions 646 and 647 facing each other across the main control board 620. And a pair of second front side peripheral wall portions 648 and 649 facing each other with the main control board 620 interposed therebetween, and the first front side peripheral wall portions 646 and 647 and the second front side peripheral wall portions 648 and 649 serve as corner portions. It is connected via.

  The first front peripheral wall portions 646 and 647 are formed such that the outer surfaces of the first front peripheral wall portions 646 and 647 face the inner surfaces of the side wall portions 751 and 752 of the holding member 740. Further, the second front side peripheral wall portion 649 is formed so that the outer surface thereof faces the bulging portion 742 of the holding member 740. In other words, the front-side structure 631 is configured to fit in a region surrounded by the both side wall portions 751 and 752 and the bulging portion 742 of the holding member 740.

  The main control board 620 is accommodated in a space defined by the front-side facing wall portion 635 and the front-side peripheral wall portion 645 in the front-side structure 631. That is, the front side structure 631 has a substantially box shape opened to one side (specifically, on the side of the opposing plate 741 of the holding member 740), and the main control board 620 is accommodated in the front side structure 631. It has become.

  As described above, the back-side structure 632 is combined with the front-side structure 631 in which the main control board 620 is integrated, and the open side of the front-side structure 631 is blocked by the back-side structure 632. It has become.

  The back-side structure 632 includes a back-side facing wall portion 675 that faces both the solder surface 620 b of the main control board 620 and the facing plate portion 741 of the holding member 740. The outer shape (length dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main control board 620) of the back-side facing wall 675 is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape (length dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main control board 620) of the opposing plate 741 of the holding member 740. The holding member 740 is configured to fit into a region sandwiched between both side wall portions 751 and 752. A rear side peripheral wall portion 685 standing up at least on the main control board 620 side and corresponding to the front side peripheral wall portion 645 is integrally formed on the entire outer peripheral edge of the back side opposing wall portion 675. The back-side peripheral wall portions 685 are disposed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the main control board 620 and are disposed on both sides in the short-side direction of the main control board 620, and a pair of first back-side peripheral wall portions 686, 687 facing each other across the main control board 620. And a pair of second back side peripheral wall portions 688 and 689 facing each other across the main control board 620. The first back side peripheral wall portions 686 and 687 and the second back side peripheral wall portions 688 and 689 serve as corner portions. It is connected via.

  The first back side peripheral wall portions 686 and 687 are opposed to the side wall portions 751 and 752 of the holding member 740, and the leading edges of the first back side peripheral wall portions 686 and 687 are the first front side peripheral wall portions 646 of the front side structure 631. , 647 is formed so as to abut on the front edge of the board 630 and together with the first front side peripheral wall portions 646, 647, constitutes the outline of the substrate box 630. On the other hand, in the second back-side peripheral wall portions 688 and 689, the outer surfaces of the second back-side peripheral wall portions 688 and 689 abut against the inner surfaces of the second front-side peripheral wall portions 648 and 649 of the back-side component 632, and inside the substrate box 630. It is formed to be accommodated. In other words, these second back-side peripheral wall portions 688 and 689, together with the second front-side peripheral wall portions 648 and 649, are such that the direction of combination of both components 631 and 632 is the same as the direction of the plate surface of the main control board 620. It is stipulated in.

  Here, the structure regarding fixation with the front side structural body 631 and the back side structural body 632 is demonstrated. As means for fixing the front side structure 631 and the back side structure 632, (1) a fixing tool such as a screw, (2) a sealing seal, and (3) a caulking structure are provided. Therefore, each of these fixing means and the related configuration will be described individually.

  First, the configuration relating to the fixture and its attachment will be described.

  Connecting portions 653, 654, 693, and 694 connected to the first front side peripheral wall portions 646 and 647 of the front side structure 631 and the first back side peripheral wall portions 686 and 687 of the back side structure 632 by a fixing tool 690 such as a screw. Is provided. Connection portions 653 and 654 (hereinafter referred to as front-side connection portions 653 and 654) of the front-side structure 631 protrude from the first front-side peripheral wall portions 646 and 647 and extend along the first front-side peripheral wall portions 646 and 647. 620 is formed so as to form a ridge extending in the short direction. Similarly, connecting portions 693 and 694 (hereinafter referred to as back-side connecting portions 693 and 694) of the back-side structure 632 protrude from the first back-side peripheral wall portions 686 and 687, and extend along the first back-side peripheral wall portions 686 and 687. The main control board 620 is formed so as to form a ridge extending in the short direction. The front side connecting parts 653 and 654 of the front side structure 631 and the back side connecting parts 693 and 694 of the back side structure 632 are combined to form the substantially rectangular parallelepiped protrusions 703 and 704 on the outer shell of the substrate box 630. Has been.

  One end of each of the front side connecting portions 653 and 654 is connected to one of the second front side peripheral wall portions 648 and 649, and the other end of the front side connecting portion 653 and 654 is the first front side peripheral wall portion 646. , 647 and step portions 655 and 656 are formed. Similarly, one end of the back side connecting portions 693 and 694 is connected to one of the second front side peripheral wall portions 648 and 649 where the front side connecting portions 653 and 654 are connected, and the front side connecting portion 653 is connected. At the other end of 654, stepped portions 655 and 656 that are continuous with the front side connecting portions 653 and 654 are formed. That is, a series of stepped portions 705 and 706 are formed at the end portion (lower end portion) on the bulging portion 742 side of the holding member 740 in the ridge portions 703 and 704. Each of these step portions 655 and 656 has a wall shape facing the short direction of the main control board 620.

  The front side connecting portions 653 and 654 are formed with insertion holes 657 and 658 through which the fixing tool 690 is inserted. Holes 697 and 698 are formed. By mounting the fixture 690 from the front side structural body 631 side, both the structural bodies 631 and 632 are integrated.

  Further, the front side connecting portions 653 and 654 are provided with cover bodies 691 and 692 that cover the exposed portions of the fixture 690, and housing recesses 659 and 660 that receive the cover bodies 691 and 692 are formed. Yes. The cover bodies 691 and 692 are formed with flat portions 691a and 692a that are flush with the outer surfaces of the front side connecting portions 653 and 654 in a state of being fitted into the receiving concave portions 659 and 660. The outer surface of the front side connecting portions 653 and 654 including at least a part of 692a and the outer surface of the back side connecting portions 693 and 694 constitute the sticking region SE1 of the seal seal S1.

  Next, the seal seal S1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the seal seal S1 is pasted on the protrusions 703 and 704 (specifically, the pasting region SE1) so as to straddle the boundary between the front side connecting portions 653 and 654 and the back side connecting portions 693 and 694. Yes. When the seal seal S1 is peeled off after being stuck, the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer remains on the connecting parts 653, 654, 693, 694 side and cannot be re-sticked. When the seal seal S1 is peeled off, the trace remains, so that it can be confirmed whether or not the main control board 620 has been removed from the board box 630. With this configuration, in the case where the substrate box 630 is illegally opened, for example, an illegal act can be found by confirming the seal seal S1.

  Incidentally, a seal cover SC1 is affixed to each of the protrusions 703 and 704 so as to cover the affixed seal seal S1 from the outside. The seal cover SC1 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and the seal seal S1 is visible through the seal cover SC1. Note that the seal cover SC1 may be omitted. In addition, as the sealing sticker S1, a seal having an IC tag that transmits a response wave including unique ID information in response to a calling wave from a predetermined scanner may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 33 and the like, the caulking structure includes a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) front side coupling portions 661 provided on the front side configuration body 631 and a back side configuration body 632 provided on these front side coupling portions. And a back side coupling portion 699 provided to correspond one-to-one. The front-side coupling portion 661 is integrally formed with the second front-side peripheral wall portion 649 of the front-side structure 631 (the second front-side peripheral wall portion 649 opposite to the side where the protrusions 703 and 704 are connected). Specifically, the front side coupling portion 661 is formed at the tip of the support portion 662 that stands up from the second front side peripheral wall portion 649 and is supported by the support portion 662. The support portion 662 has a thin plate shape so that it can be easily cut by a tool such as a nipper. The back side coupling portion 699 is integrally formed with the second back side peripheral wall portion 689 of the back side structure 632 (the second back side peripheral wall portion 689 opposite to the side where the protruding portions 703 and 704 are connected). Specifically, the back-side coupling portion 699 is formed at the tip of the support portion 700 erected from the second back-side peripheral wall portion 689 and is supported by the support portion 700.

  Screw holes that communicate with each other on the same axis are formed in the pair of coupling portions 661 and 699 in both the structural bodies 631 and 632. Specifically, a through hole 663 into which a screw is inserted is formed in the front side structural body 631, and a bottomed screw hole 701 into which the screw is screwed is formed in the back side structural body 632. Breaking screws 702 are attached to the through holes 663 and screw holes 701 that are in communication from the front side coupling portion 661 side. A plurality of combinations of the front-side coupling portion 661 and the back-side coupling portion 699 are provided as described above, and one of these combinations is coupled by the breaking screw 702. Here, the breaking screw 702 is a screw whose strength is set low at the connecting portion between the head on which the tip can be inserted into a tool such as a screwdriver and the side on which the screw groove is formed, and can be tightened further. When a predetermined force is further applied to the head by the tool at a position where it cannot be performed, the connecting portion is cut and the head is separated. That is, the breaking screw 702 cannot be rotated in the loosening direction using the tool after screwing. 29 and 32 show a state in which the heads of the breaking screws 702 are separated. Incidentally, a known one-way screw or the like may be used instead of the breaking screw 702. It is also possible to fix using pins.

  Since the front side coupling portion 661 and the back side coupling portion 699 are coupled as described above, the two structural bodies 631 and 632 are fixed to each other in a non-separable state. And since the head of the breaking screw 702 which couple | bonds both the connection parts 661 and 699 is isolate | separated, the said breaking screw 702 cannot be loosened.

  In addition, when at least one of the coupling parts 661 and 699 is broken in order to release the fixing of the two structural bodies 631 and 632 by the coupling of the coupling parts 661 and 699, the destruction trace is an opening of the substrate box 630. It will remain as a history. Thereby, when the board | substrate box 630 is opened illegally, it is possible to discover the fact.

  As described above in detail, when the integrated main controller 610 is attached / detached, a defining means 760 is provided for defining the attaching / detaching direction of the main controller 610. Therefore, the defining means 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30, 31 and 34. 34A is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 29, and FIG. 34B is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG.

<Configuration relating to defining means 760>
The holding member 740 has guide grooves 761 and 762 into which the protrusions 703 and 704 of the substrate box 630 are fitted. Specifically, plate-like portions 763 and 764 that face the opposing plate portion 741 at a predetermined interval are formed at the leading edges of the side wall portions 751 and 752, respectively. Guide grooves 761 and 762 are formed by 751 and 752 and the plate-like portions 763 and 764. The distance between the opposing plate portion 741 and the plate-like portions 763 and 764 is set to be equal to the thickness of the ridge portions 703 and 704 (length in the surface direction of the main control board 620). The protrusions 703 and 704 are movable in the guide grooves 761 and 762.

  The guide grooves 761 and 762 extend in the radial direction of the rotation center axis CL of the holding member 740 (that is, the direction orthogonal to the rotation center axis CL), and the end of the rotation tip side is open. That is, the ends opposite to the mounting portions 743 and 744 in the guide grooves 761 and 762 are opened, and insertion ports 765 and 766 for inserting the protrusions 703 and 704 of the board box 630 are configured. That is, the holding member 740 and the main controller 610 are combined by inserting the board box 630 through the insertion ports 765 and 766.

  When the main controller 610 slides along the guide grooves 761 and 762 and reaches a predetermined mounting completion position at the base portion of the protrusions 703 and 704 in the board box 630 (the respective structural bodies 631 and 632). In addition, stopper portions 707 and 708 are formed in contact with the insertion openings 765 and 766 of the guide grooves 761 and 762 from the front side in the insertion direction. That is, stopper portions 707 and 708 are formed as positioning means for defining the depth position of the substrate box 630.

  When the board box 630 is attached to the pedestal unit 710, the protrusions 703 and 704 of the board box 630 are inserted into the guide grooves 761 and 762, and the board box 630 is pushed along the guide grooves 761 and 762. Based on the pushing operation of the substrate box 630, the stopper portions 707, 708 and the insertion ports 765, 766 are brought into contact with each other, so that the operator is informed that the substrate box 630 has reached the mounting completion position. It has become.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 again, the configuration relating to the fixing between the holding member 740 and the substrate box 630 will be described in detail. As a fixing means between the holding member 740 and the substrate box 630, (1) a fixing tool such as a screw, (2) a sealing seal, and (3) a caulking structure are provided. Therefore, each of these fixing means and the related configuration will be described individually. Note that these fixing means are similar in part to the fixing means of the two structural members 631 and 632 described above. Therefore, detailed description of these similarities is omitted.

  First, the configuration relating to the fixture and its attachment will be described.

  The board box 630 and the holding member 740 are fixed by a fixture 771 such as a screw in a state where the board box 630 is disposed at the mounting completion position. Specifically, the plate-like portion 763 of the holding member 740 is formed with a through-hole 767 that penetrates in the thickness direction of the plate-like portion 763, and the protrusion 703 of the substrate box 630 communicates with the through-hole 767. A screw hole 709 is formed. The board box 630 and the holding member 740 are integrated by screwing the fixture 771 from the holding member 740 side.

  The holding member 740 is formed with an accommodating portion 768 that accommodates the head of the fixture 771 so as to continue to the through hole 767. That is, in the state where the fixing tool 771 is screwed, the protrusion of the plate-like portion 763 from the outer surface 763a is suppressed by the head portion of the fixing device 771 being accommodated in the housing portion 768. An area including the accommodating portion 768 in the plate-like portion 763 constitutes a part of the pasting region SE2 of the seal seal S2.

  In addition, a planar sticking portion 643 that is continuous with the outer surface 763a of the plate-like portion 763 is formed in the substrate box 630 (specifically, the front-side facing wall portion 635 of the front-side structure 631). The pasting portion 643 constitutes a pasting region SE2 together with the plate-like portion 763, and the seal seal S2 is pasted so as to straddle the boundary between them. Since the seal seal S2 has the same configuration as the seal seal S1 as the fixing means for the two structural bodies 631 and 632 described above, detailed description thereof is omitted. Whether or not to provide a seal cover that covers the seal seal S2 is arbitrary.

  As shown in FIG. 30 and the like, the caulking structure includes a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) box-side coupling portions 667 provided on the front-side structure 631, and the box-side coupling portions provided on the holding member 740. And pedestal side coupling portions 772 provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to 667. The box-side coupling portion 667 is integrally formed with respect to the lower second front-side peripheral wall portion 649 (the second front-side peripheral wall portion 649 opposite to the side where the protrusions 703 and 704 are connected) in the front-side structure 631. ing. Specifically, the box-side coupling portion 667 is formed at the tip of the support portion 668 standing from the second front-side peripheral wall portion 649 and is supported by the support portion 668. The support portion 668 has a thin plate shape so that it can be cut by a tool such as a nipper. The box side coupling portion 667 is formed with a communication hole 669 continuous with the base side coupling portion 772 and a fitting portion 670 into which the operation portion 776 of the locking member 775 is fitted. The pedestal side coupling portion 772 is integrally formed with the bulging portion 742 of the holding member 740 and has a locked portion (not shown) that is hooked on the claw portion 777 of the locking member 775.

  When the locking member 775 inserted through the box side coupling portion 667 is hooked on the base side coupling portion 772, the substrate box 630 and the holding member 740 are integrated. Thus, in the state where the locking member 775 is mounted, access to the claw portion 777 of the locking member 775 is blocked by both the coupling portions 667 and 772, and the removal of the locking member 775 is both the coupling portions. It is obstructed by 667 and 772. That is, once the locking member 775 is mounted, the locking member 775 is configured to be unremovable.

  In order to release the coupled state by the locking member 775, it is necessary to destroy (for example, cut) the support portion 668 described above. In other words, it is possible to release the connection between the substrate box 630 and the holding member 740 due to destruction or the like. For this reason, after the separation of the substrate box 630 and the holding member 740, a destruction trace remains as a history, and it is possible to confirm the fact of removal of the substrate box 630.

  In particular, the substrate box 630 can be removed a plurality of times by providing a plurality of combinations of the coupling portions 667 and 772. Furthermore, the number of removals of the board box 630 can be easily grasped based on the destruction traces of the coupling portions 667 and 772.

  The main control device 610 attached to the inner casing 310 via the pedestal unit 710 is arranged so that the element mounting surface 620a of the main control board 620 faces the front of the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 5). . For this reason, by opening the inner door 400, it is possible to visually recognize the element mounting surface 620a of the main control board 620, and it is easy to check fraud on the element mounting surface 620a. Further, the holding member 740 is rotatable forward of the slot machine 10 about the rotation center axis CL of the shaft pins 748 and 749. Here, a configuration relating to the relative movement of the main controller 610 and the holding member 740 and the base member 720 will be described with reference to FIG. 35A is a side view showing a state in which the main control device 610 is closed with respect to the pedestal member 720, and FIG. 35B is a side view showing a state in which the main control device 610 is open with respect to the pedestal member 720. FIG. In addition, the two-dot chain line shown in FIG. 35 is the case body 842 of the housing | casing 11, the sub control apparatus 800 mentioned later, and the relay substrate 841.

  As shown in FIG. 35A, when the main controller 610 is rotated together with the holding member 740 from the state where the main controller 610 is closed with respect to the base member 720, the holding member 740 is tilted. At the same time, the main controller 610 also falls to the front side. When the holding member 740 and the control device 610 are rotated to a predetermined position, specifically, when the rotation amount reaches approximately 90 degrees, the front end edge of the side wall portion 751 of the holding member 740 is moved to the sub-control device 800 (details will be described later). It comes into contact with the stopper portion 824a). As a result, the rotation of the main controller 610 and the holding member 740 is restricted (see FIG. 35B).

  Thus, in a state where the rotation of the main control device 610 and the holding member 740 is restricted by the sub-control device 800, the solder surface 620b of the main control board 620 faces upward. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether fraud is not performed on the solder surface 620b side without removing the main control device 610, thereby ensuring workability.

  Further, the screw hole 722a into which a fixing member for fixing the base member 720 to the back plate portion 310c is screwed is disposed behind the main control device 610 and the holding member 740 in the rotated state. That is, the screw holes 722a and the fixtures screwed into the screw holes 722a are covered with the main controller 610 and the holding member 740. Accordingly, access from the inside of the surface changing unit 300 to the fixture screwed into the screw hole 722a is avoided. For this reason, it is difficult to remove the main controller 610 together with the base member 720 without removing the surface changing unit 300 from the housing 11.

  When the main controller 610 is removed from the holding member 740, the main controller 610 is rotated as shown in FIG. Accordingly, interference between the main control device 610 and the upper bent portion 724 of the base member 720 and the top plate portion 310a of the inner housing 310 is avoided, and the main control device 610 can be removed.

  A predetermined gap is provided between the front-side facing wall portion 635 of the main control device 610 rotated in this way and a case body 842 of the relay board 841 described later, and the removal direction of the main control device 610 The movement to is not hindered.

<Configuration of main controller monitoring switch 790>
In the present embodiment, one of the features is that the main controller 610 includes a main controller monitoring switch 790 that detects whether or not the main controller 610 is disposed at a predetermined installation location of the holding member 740. . Hereinafter, the main controller monitoring switch 790 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a schematic plan view showing the relationship between the main controller 610 and the main controller monitoring switch 790. A two-dot chain line in FIG. 36 indicates the main controller 610.

  As shown in FIG. 30, FIG. 34, etc., the main controller monitoring switch 790 is disposed on the back side of the guide groove 761 in the holding member 740. Specifically, a switch housing portion 780 that houses the main control device monitoring switch 790 is provided in the back of the guide groove 761. The switch housing portion 780 includes a first back wall 781 facing the stepped portion 705 of the substrate box 630, and a second back wall that continues to the first back wall 781 and contacts the first peripheral wall portions 646 and 686 of the substrate box 630. 782, and a portion of the left side wall 751 is recessed toward the inside of the holding member 740.

  The first back wall 781 is formed with a hole 783 that exposes a part of the main controller monitoring switch 790 from the switch housing 780, and the main controller monitoring switch 790 fits into the hole 783. It is fixed in the state.

  The main controller monitoring switch 790 includes an in / out pin 791 that is provided in an in / out manner with respect to the guide groove 761 and a main body 792 that supports the in / out pin 791 so as to be movable. The main body portion 792 is formed with a protruding portion 793 that hits the first back wall 781 from the guide groove 761 side. When the protruding portion 793 hits the first back wall 781, the movement toward the switch housing portion 780 is restricted, and the main controller monitoring switch 790 is positioned. The main body 792 is formed with a locking portion (not shown) that restricts removal of the main controller monitoring switch 790 by being hooked to the switch housing portion 780.

  Here, a configuration related to attachment of the main controller monitoring switch 790 will be described. The switch accommodating portion 780 has an opening 794 that is open to the left bent portion 726 side of the base member 720. As shown in FIG. 35A, the opening 794 is closed by the left bent portion 726 while the main controller 610 is disposed at a predetermined standby position, while the holding member 740 is rotated. In a state where the main controller 610 is moved and overlapped, it is configured to avoid overlapping with the left bent portion 726. That is, the main controller monitoring switch 790 is attached through the opening 794 before the holding member 740 and the base member 720 are combined. Further, when the main control device 610 is attached to the surface changing unit 300, as shown in FIG. 35, FIG. 5, etc., the sub control device 800 is located on the side of the main control device 610. Yes. That is, when the main controller 610 rotates, the opening 794 is covered by the sub controller 800 instead of the left bent portion 726 of the base member 720. For this reason, the inconvenience that the main controller monitoring switch 790 is accessed through the opening 794 can be preferably avoided.

  A connection terminal 795 is provided on the opposite side of the main body 792 from the portion exposed from the switch housing 780, and the main controller monitoring switch 790 is connected via a harness (not shown) connected to the connection terminal 795. And a sub-control device 800, which will be described later, are electrically connected.

  An operating space for the retracting pin 791 is formed inside the main body 792, and a biasing member (not shown) such as a coil spring that biases the retracting pin 791 toward the protruding side is accommodated in this operating space. Has been.

  The protruding and retracting pin 791 has a long plate shape extending in the same direction as the guide direction defined by the guide groove 761, and one end portion of the protruding pin 791 has a planar shape facing the stepped portion 705 of both the constituent bodies 631 and 632. ing. The stroke amount of the protruding and retracting pin 791 is smaller than the overlapping amount in the guide direction between the protrusion 703 and the guide groove 761, and further the overlapping amount in the guide direction between the second back wall 782 and the first peripheral wall portions 646 and 686. It is set to be smaller.

  In a state in which the main control device 610 is disposed at a predetermined installation location on the holding member 740, the retracting pin 791 is pushed into the main body 792 to detect the presence of the main control device 610, and the main control device 610 is detected from the holding member 740. When the 610 moves in the removal direction, the retracting pin 791 returns to the protruding position and the movement of the main controller 610 is detected. When the main control device 610 is removed, the signal path to the sub control device 800 is cut off, so that the sub control device 800 cannot receive the main control device detection signal. When the device 610 is in the installed state, the signal path to the sub control device 800 becomes conductive, so that the sub control device 800 can receive the main control device detection signal.

  Next, the operation of the main controller monitoring switch 790 when the main controller 610 is attached to and detached from the holding member 740 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a partial schematic diagram showing an enlarged left side portion of the main controller unit 600. When the main controller 610 is mounted, the main controller monitoring switch 790 is changed from FIG. 37 (a) to FIG. 37 (b) → The operation is performed in the order of FIG. 37 (c) → FIG. 37 (d).

  When the main controller 610 and the holding member 740 are combined, the protrusion 703 of the main controller 610 is inserted into the guide groove 761 from the insertion port 765. When main controller 610 is pushed to a predetermined position, first peripheral wall portions 646 and 686 of main controller 610 abut against second back wall 782. As a result, a closed space CS that defines a region including the protruding and retracting pins 791 is formed by the guide groove 761, the stepped portion 705, the first back wall 781, the second back wall 782, and the first peripheral wall portions 646, 686. Access to the appearance pin 791 from the outside of the CS will be hindered (see FIG. 37B).

  By further pushing the main control device 610 along the guide groove 761, the closed space CS is gradually reduced, and the stepped portion 705 of the main control device 610 and the tip of the retracting pin 791 come into contact with each other (FIG. 37). (See (c)).

  In this manner, in the state where the in / out pin 791 and the stepped portion 705 are in contact with each other, the intruding pin 791 is pushed by the stepped portion 705 based on the movement of the main controller 610. The protrusion / contraction pin 791 moves against the urging force of the urging member, so that the protrusion amount is reduced.

  When the main controller 610 is pushed to the mounting completion position, the stopper 707 of the main controller 610 contacts the edge of the insertion port 765, thereby restricting the movement of the main controller 610 (FIG. 37 (d)). )reference). In such a state, the protrusion amount of the retracting pin 791 is minimum (specifically 0), and it is detected by the main control device monitoring switch 790 that the main control device 610 is disposed at the mounting completion position.

  In this state, the main controller 610 and the pedestal unit 710 are fixed by the fixture 771 in a state where the mounting of the main controller 610 is completed. Then, affixing the seal seal S2 to the affixing region SE2 covers the fixture 771 and connects the main controller 610 and the pedestal unit 710 via the seal seal S2. Furthermore, main controller 610 and pedestal unit 710 are integrated by attaching locking member 775 to any one of the combinations of box-side coupling portion 667 and pedestal-side coupling portion 772.

  When the main controller 610 is removed from the state where the main controller 610 has been installed in this way, the main controller monitoring switch 790 operates in the order of FIG. 37 (c) → FIG. 37 (b) → FIG. 37 (a). To do.

  When separating the main controller 610 and the pedestal unit 710, the sealing seal S2 and the fixture 771 described above are first removed. Then, by cutting the support portion 668 of the box side coupling portion 667 to which the locking member 775 is mounted, the box side coupling portion 667 remains in the base unit 710 together with the locking member 775, and the main controller 610 The slide movement is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (c), when the main control device 610 is pulled from a state in which the protrusion of the projecting pin 791 is minimized, the stepped portion 705 moves to the side away from the first back wall 781. Along with this, the retracting pin 791 moves to the protruding side by the urging force of the urging member.

  When the main controller 610 moves to a predetermined position, the protruding amount of the retracting pin 791 is maximized, and the stepped portion 705 and the retracting pin 791 are separated from each other. In such a state, the closed space CS is maintained by the first peripheral wall portions 646 and 686 of the main controller 610 remaining in contact with the second back wall 782, and the outside of the closed space CS is maintained from the outside. Access to the in / out pin 791 will be hindered. In other words, even when the in / out pin 791 moves to the protruding side and is in the most protruding state, it can be kept isolated in the closed space CS. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the main control device 610 is illegally removed by suppressing the protrusion of the in / out pin 791 by an unauthorized tool or the like, and the main control device 610 is illegally removed. .

  The main control device monitoring switch as the main control device monitoring means described in detail above is not limited to the main control device monitoring switch 790, and a known sensor (for example, a photo sensor or a proximity sensor) may be used. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the HI level signal and the LOW level signal is output when the main control device 610 is removed, and the other is output in the installed state.

<Configuration of Sub Control Device 800>
A sub-control device 800 is provided beside the main control device 610 and the reel device 550. The configuration of the sub control device 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 18, 38 and 39. FIG. 38A is a perspective view showing the configuration of the sub-control device 800, FIG. 38B is a partially enlarged view of the sub-control device 800 viewed from the side, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the sub-control device 800. FIG. In FIG. 38B, the configuration related to the inner housing 310 is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the sub control device 800 includes a sub control board 802, a monitoring control board 803, and a board box 804, and the sub control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 are included in the board box 804. Is housed.

  On the sub-control board 802, an MPU 805 is mounted as an element for executing a predetermined notification or an effect corresponding to a game situation in the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410. In addition to the MPU 805, an input / output driver IC chip 806 is mounted on the sub-control board 802, and a power supply unit 807 for disconnection made of a capacitor is mounted. Further, a plurality of connectors 808 are mounted. Is installed. In addition to the above-described members, various elements such as resistors are mounted on the sub-control board 802, and a wiring pattern is formed.

  In the sub-control board 802, various elements and connectors 808 of the MPU 805 are all mounted on the same plate surface and soldered on the opposite plate surface. In other words, the sub-control board 802 has one plate surface as an element mounting surface 802a and the other plate surface as a solder surface.

  An MPU 811 is mounted on the monitoring control board 803. The MPU 811 is an element for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred in a situation where operating power is supplied to the MPU 811 itself. In such monitoring, detection results in the hopper monitoring switch 230, the main controller monitoring switch 790, and the like are used. Details of the contents of monitoring will be described later. In addition to the MPU 811, the monitoring control board 803 is equipped with an IC chip 812 for input / output drivers and a power supply unit 813 for power interruption made of a Li secondary battery. The monitoring side connector 814 is mounted. In addition to the above members, various elements such as resistors are mounted on the monitoring control board 803, and a wiring pattern is formed.

  In the monitoring control board 803, the various elements and connectors of the MPU 811 are all mounted on the same plate surface as in the sub control board 802, and are soldered on the opposite plate surface. That is, in the monitoring control board 803, one plate surface is an element mounting surface 803a and the other plate surface is a solder surface.

  In the sub-control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803, the solder surface is a surface provided with soldering portions of various elements mounted on the element mounting surfaces 802a and 803a. May be formed. Further, the sub-control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 are not limited to single-sided boards as described above, and may be double-sided boards in which both plate surfaces are element mounting surfaces.

  The sub control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 are electrically connected. However, the electrical connection is not via the signal line, but for the sub-side connector 808a as the sub-side board connecting portion provided on the sub-control board 802 and the monitoring side board provided on the monitoring control board 803. This is done by directly connecting the monitoring side connector 814 as a connecting portion.

  Specifically, the sub-side connector 808 a is provided on one side of the sub-control board 802, and the monitoring-side connector 814 is provided on one side of the monitoring control board 803. Then, the protruding terminal portion formed to protrude outward from the one side in the sub-connector 808a is formed to open in the direction parallel to the board surface in the monitoring connector 814 and outward. By being inserted into the groove portion, the two control boards 802 and 803 are electrically connected.

  The sub-side connector 808a and the monitoring-side connector 814 are disposed on the element mounting surfaces 802a and 803a of the control boards 802 and 803 to be installed, respectively, and in a state where the connectors 808a and 814 are connected, One side of 803 is in contact with each other from the outside, and the element mounting surfaces 802a and 803a are flush with each other. That is, in the sub-control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803, the element mounting surfaces 802a and 803a on which at least the MPUs 805 and 811 are mounted are in the same direction in the state where both are electrically connected.

  Here, the sub-control board 802 is provided with a plurality of signal line connectors 808b as signal line connections for connecting signal lines in addition to the sub-side connector 808a. Other than the monitoring side connector 814, a connector for electrical connection with an external device is not provided. However, the MPU 811 mounted on the monitoring control board 803 as described above needs to be electrically connected to external devices other than the sub control board 802 including the various monitoring switches 230 and 790. Such an external device is connected to a signal line connector 808b provided on the sub-control board 802 using a signal line, and a circuit pattern formed on the sub-control board 802, the sub-side connector 808a, and It is electrically connected to the monitoring control board 803 via the monitoring side connector 814.

  The board box 804 that accommodates both the control boards 802 and 803 includes a back side structure (box base) 821 and a front side structure (box cover) 822 as a plurality of box structures. The back side structural body 821 and the front side structural body 822 are formed of a material having transparency so that the sub control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 accommodated in the board box 804 can be seen from the outside of the board box 804. . Specifically, it is formed of a colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin, but is not limited thereto, and may be an acrylic resin or the like, and may be colored and transparent.

  The front-side structure 822 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape opened to one side, and has a bulging portion 823 on the surface portion on the bulging side, and is a lower position on the opening side than the bulging portion 823. Part 824. A plurality of openings 825 are formed in the lower portion 824 in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of signal line connectors 808 b provided on the sub control board 802. The sub-control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 are unitized on the back side of the front side structure 822 so that each signal line connector 808b is exposed from the plurality of openings 825 to the front side of the front side structure 822. In this state, the sub control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 are fixed to the front side structure 822 by screws from the solder surface side. The screw fixing is such that fixing and releasing can be repeated, but it is also possible to use a one-way screw or the like so that the front structure 822 or the like needs to be destroyed when the fixing is released.

  A back-side structure 821 is combined with a front-side structure 822 to which the unitized sub-control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 are fixed. The back-side structure 821 is formed in a substantially plate shape that is rectangular in shape when viewed from the front, specifically, a rectangular shape, and is formed so as to surround the flat portion 826 formed in a flat shape and the periphery of the flat portion 826. The back side peripheral edge portion 827 is integrally formed. A locking portion 828 is integrally formed on the back side peripheral edge portion 827 so as to protrude toward the front side structural body 822. When the back side structural body 821 is combined with the front side structural body 822, the locking portion 828 is configured on the front side. The body 822 is locked to restrict separation of the two structural bodies 821 and 822. A front side peripheral edge 829 and an inner rib (not shown) are formed on the opening edge of the front side structural body 822 in the present embodiment so as to sandwich the back side peripheral edge 827 of the back side structural body 821 from the inside and outside of the substrate box 804. Yes. Access to the inside of the board box 804 is suitably suppressed by fitting the front side peripheral edge 829 and the inner rib and the back side peripheral edge 827 in the entire boundary area between the two structural bodies 821 and 822.

  In addition to the locking portion 828, a fixing means is provided for the two structural bodies 821 and 822, and when the structural bodies 821 and 822 are separated by the fixing means, one of the structural bodies is broken. It is configured. Specifically, a series of overlapping portions over the entire side surface of the substrate box 804 between the open-side peripheral edge portion and the back-side peripheral edge portion 827 of the front-side structure body 822 in a state where both the structural bodies 821 and 822 are combined. Is formed, and a known adhesive is applied to the overlapping portion.

  As shown in FIG. 38, breaking screws 830 are screwed into the four corners of the board box 804 from the front side structure 822 side so as to couple the front side structure 822 and the back side structure 821. Here, the breaking screw 830 is one in which the strength of the connecting portion between the head on which the tip can be inserted into a tool such as a screwdriver and the side on which the screw groove is formed is set low, and can be tightened further. When a predetermined force is further applied to the head by the tool at a position where it cannot be performed, the connecting portion is cut and the head is separated. That is, the break screw 830 cannot be rotated in the loosening direction using the tool after screwing. It should be noted that a known one-way screw may be used instead of the break screw as long as the connection between the front side structure 822 and the back side structure 821 cannot be loosened after screwing.

  Incidentally, the configuration for fixing the two structural bodies 821 and 822 is not limited to the above, and for example, a known caulking structure may be used. In this case, a plurality of coupling parts that realize the crimped structure are provided, and the two structural bodies 821 and 822 are fixed by setting a part of the coupling parts in a coupled state, and both of the coupling parts or their surroundings are destroyed. It is good also as a structure which can fix both structure 821,822 again, after releasing fixation of the structures 821,822 by making another coupling | bond part a coupling | bonding state. In addition, any one or any combination of fixing using an adhesive, fixing using a fixing device that cannot be removed without requiring destruction, and fixing using a caulking structure may be applied.

  Further, instead of or in addition to the above-described fixed configuration, a sealing seal as a separation trace member (or a separation trace seal) may be attached so as to straddle the boundary portion between the two structural bodies 821 and 822. In the sealing seal, the adhesive layer remains on the substrate box 804 when it is peeled off from the substrate box 804 after application, and a trace is left on the substrate box 804 due to a pattern or the like applied to the adhesive layer. If attention is paid to the point that such a seal is adopted, it is sufficient that the substrate box 804 is provided with a means for leaving at least a trace of the components 821 and 822 when they are separated and opened. In addition, you may use what has an IC tag which transmits the response wave containing specific ID information in response to the ringing wave from a predetermined scanner as a seal seal.

  The back side structure 821 and the front side structure 822 are fixed to each other in the combined state as described above, thereby forming a substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 804 having a predetermined internal space as shown in FIG. The sub control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 that are unitized are accommodated in the internal space of the board box 804. In this case, the element mounting surfaces 802a and 803a of the sub-control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 are entirely opposed to the front side structure 822, and the solder surfaces of the sub-control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803 are entirely back. It faces the structure 821.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the sub-control device 800 configured as described above has the surface of the front structure 822 facing the inside of the housing 11 and the surface of the back structure 821 facing the left side plate 11 d of the housing 11. It is installed. In this case, by opening the front door 12 and the inner door 400, the front side structural body 822 can be visually recognized from the front of the slot machine 10, and further, the front side structural body 822 is formed to be colorless and transparent as described above. In this state, the element mounting surface 802a including the MPU 805 in the sub-control board 802 and the element mounting surface 803a including the MPU 811 in the monitoring control board 803 are visible.

  In the board box 804 of the sub-control device 800, a stopper that stops the rotation of the main control device 610 by contacting the holding member 740 on the inside of the surface changing unit 300, that is, the front-side structure 822 facing the main control device 610 side. A portion 824a is provided. The stopper portion 824a is formed so as to protrude from the lower portion 824 to the inside of the surface changing unit 300, and contacts the front end edge of the side wall portion 751 of the holding member 740 when the main control device 610 rotates to the front side. The amount of protrusion is set so that it may touch. Further, the lower portion 824 is formed with an escape portion 824b that avoids interference with the protrusion 753 of the holding member 740. The escape portion 824b has a concave shape formed along a track along which the protrusion 753 moves as the main control device 610 rotates.

  The sub-control device 800 is attached so that a trace remains based on the removal. Specifically, the left side plate portion 310 d of the inner housing 310 is formed with a housing side coupling portion 391 that constitutes a fixing means for the sub control device 800. A control device side coupling portion 831 corresponding to the housing side coupling portion 391 is formed in the front side structure 822 of the sub control device 800. Removal of the sub-control device 800 is restricted by attaching a coupling member 835 to both the coupling portions 391 and 831.

  The coupling member 835 has a cylindrical body part 836 and an operation part 837 integrally formed with the body part 836. The control device side coupling portion 831 is formed with an insertion hole portion 832 through which the body portion 836 is inserted, and an operation portion 837 with a coupling member 835 attached to the inlet portion of the insertion hole portion 832. A housing recess 833 for housing the housing is formed. A communication hole 392 communicating with the insertion hole portion 832 of the control device side connection portion 831 is formed in the housing side connection portion 391, and a part of the body portion 836 of the connection member 835 is fitted into the communication hole 392. Yes. In the coupling member 835, a claw portion 838 that protrudes from the body portion 836 is formed in the body portion 836 that is fitted in the communication hole 392. The communication holes 392 of the housing side coupling portion 391 are formed with receiving portions 393 that are hooked on the claw portions 838. When the claw portions 838 and the receiving portion 393 are hooked, the coupling member 835 cannot be removed. . In such a state, the operation portion 837 of the coupling member 835 is housed in the housing recess 833, and it is difficult to act such as picking the operation portion 837 with a finger or the like.

  The control device side coupling portion 831 is connected to the front side structure 822 via a connecting plate portion 834. The connecting plate portion 834 is formed in a thin plate shape so that the breaking work (for example, cutting work) is easier than the breaking work of the coupling portions 391 and 831. When the sub-control device 800 is removed, the connecting plate portion 834 is cut so that the destruction trace remains. Note that the configuration for coupling the sub-control device 800 and the inner housing 310 is not limited to the above, and for example, a known caulking structure may be used.

  As described above, the entire inner casing 310 is integrally formed by an injection mold. In the case where the housing side coupling portion 391 is formed integrally with the left side plate portion 310d of the inner housing 310, a movable type (so-called top) is used to form the receiving portion 393 of the housing side coupling portion 391 described above. Depending on the pulling direction, a portion where the receiving portion 393 is exposed to the outside of the inner housing 310 tends to exist. That is, it is difficult to avoid exposure of the receiving portion 393 because of the mold structure.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B, a shielding portion 839 that covers the exposed portion EP of the housing-side coupling portion 391 is integrally formed with the back-side structure 821. . In a state where the sub control device 800 is disposed at a predetermined position, the exposed portion EP is covered by the shielding portion 839, and access to the receiving portion 393, the claw portion 838, and the like is suppressed.

  The sub control device 800 is electrically connected to the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410 provided on the front door 12. These devices are driven and controlled by the sub-control board 802.

  A flat partition 840 that bisects the inner region of the inner casing 310 is formed between the reel device 550 and the main control device 610 on the side of the sub-control device 800. More specifically, the partition portion 840 is disposed below the upper opening 347 of the right side plate portion 310e. A relay substrate 841 for electrical connection with the main controller 610 and the reel device 550 is mounted on the upper surface of the partition portion 840.

  The relay board 841 is covered with a case body 842 provided corresponding to the relay board 841. The case body 842 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material such as a polycarbonate resin, and the relay substrate 841 disposed inside the case body 842 is visible through the case body 842. 13 to 17, it is difficult to confirm the relay board 841, so refer to the perspective view of FIG.

<Description of connector connection mechanism>
Here, a connection mechanism for electrically connecting the surface changing unit 300 and the housing 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 7, 12, and 14. The connection mechanism includes case connectors 851 and 852 provided on the case 11 side and surface change connectors 881 and 882 provided on the surface change unit 300 side. The inner case 310 (surface change unit 300) is connected to the connection mechanism. The housing connectors 851 and 852 and the face change connectors 881 and 882 can be coupled with each other in a state where the housing 11 is mounted. Each component will be described in detail below.

<Description of housing connectors 851 and 852>
First, the outline of the housing connectors 851 and 852 will be described with reference to FIGS. The housing connectors 851 and 852 are such that the insertion ports 853 and 854 into which the face change connectors 881 and 882, which are mating counterparts, are inserted are in front of the slot machine 10, that is, the front side in the mounting direction of the inner case 310 (face change unit 300). Is attached to the rear bent portion 255 of the partition unit 250. The housing connectors 851 and 852 are arranged side by side on both sides of the rail member 270, and are arranged so that the height positions of the partition plate 251 from the flat plate portion 252 are equal. More specifically, the housing connectors 851 and 852 are arranged such that the connector pin arrangement direction is the same as the juxtaposed direction (left-right direction) of the housing connectors 851 and 852.

  The right housing connector 852 of the rail member 270 is electrically connected to the main control device 610, and the left housing connector 851 of the rail member 270 is electrically connected to the sub control device 800. By inserting the surface changing connectors 881 and 882 into the housing connectors 851 and 852, the housing connectors 851 and 852 and the surface changing connectors 881 and 882 are electrically connected. The harnesses H1 and H2 are connected to the housing connectors 851 and 852 via relay boards 855 and 856, respectively, and these harnesses H1 and H2 are guided to the lower part of the housing 11 along the back plate 11c. The power supply box 170 and the hopper device 180 are connected.

  Since the left and right housing connectors 851 and 852 are similar in structure and mounting structure to the partition plate 251, the mounting structure of the left housing connector 851 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .

  In the rear bent portion 255 of the partition plate 251, a sub-side relay substrate 855 having a horizontally long plate shape is fixed to the front side of the rear bent portion 255 by a fixing tool such as a screw. The above-described housing connector 851 is integrated with a fixture such as a screw on the plate surface opposite to the rear bent portion 255 in the sub-side relay board 855. A substrate opening 255 a is formed in the rear bent portion 255 corresponding to the sub-side relay substrate 855. As a result, interference between the rear bent portion 255 and the solder surface of the sub relay board 855 is avoided. The flat plate portion 252 of the partition plate 251 is provided with a harness opening 252 a adjacent to the housing connector 851 that guides the harness H <b> 1 extending from the sub-side relay board 855 to a region below the partition plate 251.

  Similarly, the right housing connector 852 is fixed to the rear bent portion 255 via the main relay substrate 856, and the rear bent portion 255 is for a board corresponding to the main relay substrate 856. An opening 255b is formed. Further, the right main relay board 856 is fixed to the rear bent portion 255 via a sheet material 857 as a cushioning material formed so as to be elastically deformable. Thereby, the housing connector 852 and the main relay board 856 are protected. A similar sheet material may be attached to the left sub-side relay board 855.

  Next, the surface changing connectors 881 and 882 will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, the surface changing connectors 881 and 882 are provided on the bottoms of the housing recesses 381 and 382 formed in the back plate portion 310c corresponding to the housing connectors 851 and 852. The surface changing connectors 881 and 882 are in a state where the insertion ports 853 and 854 that fit into the insertion ports 853 and 854 of the housing connectors 851 and 852 face the mounting direction front side of the inner housing 310 (the surface changing unit 300). , Attached to the housing recess 442. In the housing recess 442, holes (not shown) penetrating inward and outward are formed corresponding to the surface changing connectors 881 and 882, and the surface changing connector 881 and the sub-control device 800 are connected to each other through the holes. The surface change connector 882 and the main controller 610 are connected by a harness (not shown).

  The coupling direction of the housing connectors 851 and 852 and the surface changing connectors 881 and 882 is configured to be the same as the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300 defined by the rail member 270 and the guide groove 360. Therefore, the face change connectors 881 and 882 and the case connectors 851 and 852 can be coupled together with the pushing operation of the inner case 310 (the face change unit 300) into the case 11. Similarly, the face change connectors 881 and 882 and the case connectors 851 and 852 can be separated by a pulling operation of the inner case 310. For this reason, in the replacement work of the surface changing unit 300, it is not necessary for the operator to separately perform an operation of inserting and connecting the connectors 851, 852, 881, and 882 and releasing the connectors by separating them. Thereby, it is possible to efficiently replace the surface changing unit 300.

  Further, each of the surface changing connectors 881 and 882 is mounted so as to be movable by a fixing tool such as a screw. Specifically, it is attached in a state in which movement of a predetermined amount (about 1.2 mm in the present embodiment) is allowed in a direction orthogonal to the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300. That is, the housing connectors 851 and 852 are configured to be movable in any direction such as up and down and left and right even in the coupled state. For example, even when a force is applied in a direction different from the attaching / detaching direction when replacing the surface changing unit 300, it is possible to prevent the force from concentrating on the connection portions of the connectors 851, 852, 881, and 882. Thereby, damage to the connectors 851, 852, 881, and 882 can be avoided.

  Here, referring to FIG. 22 again, the coupling of the housing connectors 851 and 852 and the surface changing connectors 881 and 882 based on the mounting operation of the surface changing unit 300 will be described.

  Of all the sections in which the surface changing unit 300 is moved to the mounting completion position, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the section in which the position variation of the surface changing unit 300 is allowed (that is, the first restriction). In the section), the housing connectors 851 and 852 and the face change connectors 881 and 882 are maintained in a separated state. That is, it is possible to avoid the influence of the positional variation of the surface changing unit 300 from reaching the housing connectors 851 and 852 and the surface changing connectors 881 and 882.

  When the surface changing unit 300 is pushed into the rear side of the housing 11 from the state shown in FIG. 22B, the positional variation of the surface changing unit 300 is suppressed, and the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300 and the housing connector 851, The coupling direction of 852 and the surface changing connectors 881 and 882 coincides with each other. That is, the first restriction section moves to the second restriction section. In the second restriction section, as described above, the protrusions 280a and 281a of the rail member 270 abut against the front facing walls 370 and 371 of the guide groove 360, and the protrusions 276a and 277a of the rail member 270 are the same guide groove. 360 abuts against the rear facing walls 366, 367. Thereby, the dispersion | variation in the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300 is suppressed. Then, as shown in FIG. 22C, the housing connectors 851 and 852 and the face change connectors 881 and 882 face each other.

  In this way, when the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300 and the connecting direction of the connectors 851, 852, 881, and 882 coincide with each other, the surface changing unit 300 is further pushed into the housing connector 851, 852 and the surface connector. The replacement connectors 881 and 882 are coupled (see FIG. 22D).

<Configuration of external concentration terminal board 900>
Here, the external concentrated terminal board 900 and the configuration related to the external concentrated terminal board 900 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 6, 7 and 40 to 42. 40 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the external concentrated terminal board 900 attached, FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view showing the external concentrated terminal board 900 and the holder member 920 disassembled, and FIG. 42 is a portion taken along line EE of FIG. It is sectional drawing. In FIG. 40, a part of the configuration (for example, the main controller 610) associated with the housing 11 and the surface changing unit 300 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the external concentration terminal board 900 has a substantially rectangular shape (substantially rectangular shape) extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side plate 11 e via a holder member 920. The external concentrated terminal plate 900 and the holder member 920 are disposed corresponding to the upper opening 347 of the inner casing 310. That is, in a state where the surface changing unit 300 is disposed in the housing 11, the external concentrated terminal board 900 (particularly, each connector 901 and 902 described later) is exposed when viewed from the inside of the surface changing unit 300. Yes. As a result, the external concentrated terminal board 900 can be accessed via the upper opening 347 of the inner casing 310.

  The holder member 920 has a base plate portion 921 parallel to the right side plate 11e. The base plate portion 921 is fixed to the right side plate 11e by a fixing tool 922 such as a screw, so that the holder member 920 is attached to the housing 11.

  A plurality of support portions 923 and 924 for supporting the external concentrated terminal plate 900 in a state of facing the surface changing unit 300 side are formed on the peripheral portion of the plate surface 921a facing the inside of the housing 11 in the base plate portion 921. ing. Each of the support portions 923 and 924 has a protruding shape protruding from the plate surface 921a, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, for convenience, the upper support portions 923 are referred to as “upper support portions 923”, and the lower support portions 924 are referred to as “lower support portions 924”.

  In the base plate portion 921, outside the support portions 923 and 924, the restriction portions 925 to restrict the movement of the external concentration terminal plate 900 in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction by contacting the external concentration terminal plate 900. 928 is integrally formed. More specifically, the restricting portions 925 to 928 are arranged along the outer peripheral edge of the base plate portion 921 and have a wall shape rising from the base plate portion 921. That is, the external concentration terminal board 900 is surrounded by the restriction portions 925 to 928. Of the restricting portions 925 to 928, a restricting portion 925 (upper restricting portion 925) disposed above the external concentrated terminal plate 900 and a restricting portion 926 (lower side) disposed below the external concentrated terminal plate 900. The restricting portion 926) is formed so that the surface of the external concentrated terminal board 900 supported by the support portions 923 and 924 and the leading edges of the restricting portions 925 and 926 are located on the same plane. Thereby, in the control part 925-928, the protrusion to the inner side rather than the external concentration terminal board 900 is avoided. On the other hand, among the restricting portions 925 to 928, the restricting portion 927 (front restricting portion 927) disposed on the front side in the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300 (that is, the opening side of the housing 11) and the mounting of the surface changing unit 300. The restricting portion 928 (the back-side restricting portion 928) disposed on the back side in the direction (that is, the back side of the housing 11) slightly protrudes from the surface of the external concentrated terminal board 900 supported by the support portions 923 and 924. It is formed to do. Thereby, even when the mounting track of the surface changing unit 300 varies when attaching and detaching the surface changing unit 300, it is difficult to cause inconvenience that the surface changing unit 300 and the external concentrated terminal plate 900 are caught. .

  The restricting portions 925 and 926 are integrally formed with locking plate portions 929 and 930 that are provided adjacent to the lower support portion 924 and hooked to the external concentrated terminal plate 900, and the restricting portions 927 and 928 have upper portions. Locking claw portions 931 and 932 that are provided adjacent to the support portion 923 and are hooked on the external concentration terminal board 900 are provided. The external concentrated terminal plate 900 is detachably held by the locking plate portions 929 and 930 and the locking claw portions 931 and 932.

  On the upper side of the base plate portion 921, a connector guide portion 935 for guiding the hole side connector C1 provided in the harness H3 extending from the hole management device or the like to the external concentrated terminal plate 900 is integrally formed. The connector guide portion 935 has a passage portion 936 that extends in the same direction (front-rear direction) as the mounting direction of the surface changing unit 300. The passage portion 936 is connected to the harness through hole 938 formed in the back plate 11c of the housing 11, and the passage width dimension and the passage height dimension are set to be larger than the width dimension of the hole-side connector C1. . This makes it difficult to hold the hole-side connector C1 in the passage portion 936. Further, the harness through hole 938 and the passage portion 936 are positioned higher than the external concentration terminal plate 900. For this reason, the hole-side connector C1 inserted from the outside of the housing 11 and passed through the passage portion 936 is easily guided to the external concentration terminal board 900 side by its own weight.

  A protrusion 940 that protrudes toward the back plate 11c is integrally formed at an edge of the passage portion 936 on the back plate 11c side. The protrusion 940 is formed corresponding to the harness through hole 938. The protrusion 940 fits into the harness through hole 938, and comes into contact with the harness through hole 938 from the inside of the opening, thereby holding the holder member 920. Is positioned. This makes it difficult for the relative position between the passage portion 936 and the harness through hole 938 to shift.

  A plurality of guide ribs 941 are formed on the front side of the passage portion 936 to guide the hall side connector C1 to the side away from the right side plate 11e of the housing 11. The hole-side connector C1 pushed from the back plate 11c side through the passage portion 936 is guided to the external concentrated terminal plate 900 side by moving along the guide rib 941.

  Two connectors 901 and 902 are provided on the plate surface 900a facing the inner housing 310 side of the external concentrated terminal plate 900 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction. More specifically, a first connector 901 connected to the hole-side connector C1 is provided on the guide portion 935 side of the external concentrated terminal plate 900 (specifically, the upper end portion side of the external concentrated terminal plate 900). The first connector 901 is arranged so that the insertion port 903 into which the hole-side connector C <b> 1, which is a coupling partner, is inserted faces the slot machine 10 along the plate surface 900 a of the external concentration terminal board 900. That is, the first connector 901 is arranged so that the mounting direction of the hall-side connector C1 is parallel to the plate surface 900a of the external concentrated terminal board 900.

  The first connector 901 has a horizontally long shape extending along the upper end portion (long side) of the external concentrated terminal board 900. The first connector 901 is provided with a plurality of connection terminals, and these connection terminals are arranged along the upper end portion (long side) of the external concentrated terminal plate 900, that is, in the longitudinal direction of the first connector 901. Yes. By arranging the connection terminals in this way, the size of the first connector 901 in the short direction of the external concentrated terminal board 900 is reduced.

  A harness H4 (specifically, a gaming machine side connector C2 attached to the harness) connected to the relay board 856 is connected to the relay board 856 side of the external concentrated terminal board 900 (specifically, the lower end side of the external concentrated terminal board 900). A second connector 902 is provided. The second connector 902 is arranged so that the insertion port 904 into which the gaming machine side connector C <b> 2 which is a coupling partner is inserted faces the surface direction of the plate surface 900 a of the external concentration terminal plate 900. That is, the second connector 902 is disposed so that the mounting direction of the gaming machine side connector C2 is orthogonal to the plate surface 900a of the external concentration terminal plate 900.

  The second connector 902 has a horizontally long shape extending along the lower end (long side) of the external concentrated terminal board 900. The second connector 902 is provided with a plurality of connection terminals, and these connection terminals are arranged along the lower end portion (long side) of the external concentrated terminal plate 900, that is, in the longitudinal direction of the second connector 902. Yes. By arranging the connection terminals in this manner, the second connector 902 can be reduced in size in the short direction of the external concentrated terminal board 900.

  The lower restricting portion 926 is formed with a protruding portion 944 that protrudes between the second connector 902 and the back restricting portion 928. The protruding portion 944 is disposed such that the distance dimension between the protruding portion 944 and the back side regulating portion 928 is equal to the distance dimension between the near side regulating portion 927 and the first connector 901. For this reason, when the external concentrated terminal plate 900 is assembled so that the first connector 901 is on the lower side and the second connector 902 is on the upper side, the protruding portion 944 and the first connector 901 come into contact with each other, The terminal board 900 is prevented from being attached. That is, the protruding portion 944 has a function of preventing the external concentrated terminal board 900 from being erroneously assembled.

  A clamp portion 945 that holds the harness H4 connected to the second connector 902 is formed below the base plate portion 921. By holding the harness H4 by the clamp portion 945, it is possible to prevent the load of the harness H4 from being applied to the connecting portion of the connectors 902 and C2. The clamp portion 945 is disposed at a position exposed from the inside of the surface changing unit 300 through the upper opening 347, similarly to the external concentration terminal board 900. In other words, the clamp part 945 is disposed at a position accessible to the clamp part 945 itself and the harness H4 held by the clamp part 945 through the upper opening 347. For this reason, by holding the harness H4 in a state before the gaming machine side connector C2 is connected by the clamp portion 945, the connection work of the connectors 902 and C2 in a state where the surface changing unit 300 is mounted is easily performed. It is possible.

  In particular, the present embodiment has a characteristic configuration regarding the attachment of the external concentration terminal board 900. The characteristic configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. 42 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line EE of FIG.

  The external concentration terminal board 900 is attached in a state of being tilted with respect to the right side board 11e. Specifically, the standing amount of the lower support portion 924 is set smaller than the standing amount of the upper support portion 923. That is, the distance dimension between the lower end portion of the external concentrated terminal board 900 and the right side plate 11e is set smaller than the distance dimension between the upper end portion of the external concentrated terminal board 900 and the right side plate 11e. As a result, the upper long side portion (upper end portion) of the external concentrated terminal board 900 protrudes to the inside of the housing 11 from the lower long side portion (lower end portion) of the external concentrated terminal plate 900. Yes.

  Further, the inclination of the external concentrated terminal board 900 is set so that the protruding amount d1 of the first connector 901 from the right side plate 11e and the protruding amount d2 of the second connector 902 from the right side plate are the same. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the maximum protrusion amount of the external concentrated terminal plate 900 from the right side plate 11e.

  The upper opening 347 of the inner casing 310 is formed such that the upper end edge thereof is biased toward the right side plate 11e side with respect to the extension region EE1 of the mounting track of the hole side connector C1 with respect to the first connector 901. Similarly, the upper opening 347 of the inner housing 310 is formed such that its lower end edge is below the extended region EE2 of the mounting track of the gaming machine side connector C2 with respect to the second connector 902. In other words, the inclination of the external concentration terminal board 900 is defined so that each of the extended regions EE1 and EE2 passes through the upper opening 347. In this manner, by avoiding interference between the upper opening 347 and the like and the extended regions EE1 and EE2, the internal space of the inner housing 310 can be easily used as a work space for connector connection.

<Connection work of external concentrated terminal board 900>
Here, connection work of the connectors 901, 902, C1, and C2 related to the external concentration terminal board 900 when the slot machine 10 is introduced into the game hall will be described.

  The slot machine 10 introduced into the game hall is in a state in which the surface changing unit 300 is installed in the housing 11 in advance. When the slot machine 10 is installed in the island facility, the hole-side connector C1 provided in the island facility is first inserted into the housing 11 through the harness through hole 938 of the back plate 11c. The hole-side connector C1 that has passed through the harness through hole 938 passes through the passage portion 936, and is then guided to the external concentrated terminal plate 900 by the guide rib 941 while being lowered downward by its own weight.

  After the hole-side connector C1 is thus inserted into the housing 11, the front door 12 and the inner door 400 are opened, and the inside of the inner housing 310 is released. Then, the hole side connector C1 is accessed through the upper opening 347 of the right side plate portion 310e, and the hole side connector C1 and the first connector 901 are coupled. Further, the gaming machine side connector C2 and the second connector 902 held by the clamp portion 945 of the holder member 920 are coupled. Thereby, the connection work of the connector regarding the external concentration terminal board 900 is completed.

<Basic Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine 10>
Next, the basic electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 621 that executes main control in the slot machine 10 is mounted on the main control board 620 of the main control device 610. The MPU 621 includes a ROM 951 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 621 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 951 is executed. And a variety of circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit. The MPU 621 may have a configuration in which a function for performing a logical operation, a function of the ROM 951, and a function of the RAM 952 are provided as separate elements. The same applies to other MPUs described later.

  A power supply device 955 provided in the power supply box 170 is connected to the MPU 621. The power supply device 955 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 610, a power failure monitoring circuit that monitors the power-off state, and the like. A DC 5V power supply (operating power) is supplied from the power supply unit. Further, the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is configured to be input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 621. When the power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal, the NMI as a power failure flag generation process is configured. Interrupt processing is executed immediately. The power failure signal is also generated when the power switch 171 of the power box 170 is turned off.

  Such a configuration for power failure is also provided for the main control board 620. In other words, the main control board 620 is equipped with the power supply unit 956 for power interruption including a backup capacitor. While the operating power is being supplied from the power supply device 955 to the main control board 620, the power supply unit 956 for power interruption is charged, and the power supply unit 956 for power interruption is discharged while the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off. Operating power is supplied to the RAM 952. Thus, even when the power to the slot machine 10 is shut off, data is stored and held in the RAM 952 while operating power is being supplied from the power supply unit 956 during power interruption to the RAM 952. Note that the power supply unit 956 for power interruption may be mounted on the power supply device 955.

  The MPU 621 is provided with an input / output port. On the input side of the MPU 621, a start detection sensor 961 that detects the operation of the start lever 45, stop detection sensors 962 a, 962 b, 962 c that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 50, 51, 52, and the medal insertion device 30 Inserted medal detection sensor 963 that detects the received medal, credit insertion detection sensors 964a and 964b that individually detect operations of the credit insertion switches 40 and 41, a settlement detection sensor 965 that detects an operation of the settlement switch 55, and a hopper device 180. The medal detection sensor 197 for detecting medals paid out from the device, the reset detection sensor 967 for detecting the operation of the reset switch 625, and the setting key detection sensor for detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion portion 626 and turned ON. Various sensors such as 968 There has been connected. Signals from these sensors and switches are received by the MPU 621 through input / output ports.

  On the output side of the MPU 621, stepping motors 969a, 969b, and 969c for rotating the reels 555, 556, and 557, a medal path switching solenoid 970 for the selector 31, a drive motor 194 for the hopper device 180, a sub-control device 800, An external concentration terminal board 900 or the like that can transmit information to a hall management device or the like is connected. A signal output from the MPU 621 through the input / output port is received by a device to which the signal is output.

<Processing executed by MPU 621 of main control board 620>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 621 of the main control board 620 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 621 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in a cycle of 1.49 msec in the slot machine 10). The timer interrupt process will be described, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S101, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is stored in the RAM 952. The power failure flag is stored when a power failure signal from the power supply device 955 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 621 and the NMI interrupt process is started. If a power failure flag is stored, a power failure process is executed in step S102. In the power failure process, a process for returning to the state before the power failure after the power recovery is executed.

  When the power failure flag is not stored, various processes after step S103 are executed. That is, in step S103, in order to rotate the reels 555, 556, and 557, stepping motor control processing for driving the stepping motors 969a, 969b, and 969c, which are the respective drive motors, is executed.

  In step S104, a sensor monitoring process for reading the status of various sensors connected to the input / output port is executed. As one process of the sensor monitoring process, it is determined whether or not a medal is inserted from the medal insertion device 30 based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection sensor 963. If a medal is inserted, the bet number is set to 1. Either the process of adding or the process of adding 1 to the number of credits is executed. In addition, as one process of the sensor monitoring process, it is determined whether or not a medal has been paid out from the hopper device 180 based on the detection result of the medal detection sensor 197. Execute the process.

  In step S105, an abnormality monitoring process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred is executed. In the abnormality monitoring process, it is determined whether or not medals are insufficient in the storage tank 181 of the hopper device 180 based on the driving state of the payout device 191 in the hopper device 180 and the detection result of the medal detection sensor 197. As a result, if there are insufficient medals, a medal shortage flag is stored in the RAM 952. The medal shortage flag is held until the storage tank 181 is replenished with medals and a normal medal payout operation can be executed. In the state where the medal shortage flag is stored, the output of the drive signal to the drive motor 194 is stopped so that the payout operation in the payout device 191 is prohibited.

  If there are not enough medals, a main-side notification start command including information to that effect is set, and the main-side notification start command is transmitted to the sub-control device 800 by command output processing described later. The MPU 805 of the sub-control board 802 in the sub-control device 800 receives the main notification start command to indicate that there are insufficient medals via the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410. Announcement is executed. Further, when the shortage of medals is resolved, a main-side notification release command including information to that effect is set, and the main-side notification release command is transmitted to the sub-control device 800 by command output processing described later. The MPU 805 of the sub-control board 802 receives the main-side notification release command, thereby terminating the notification that has been made regarding the lack of medals.

  In addition, in the abnormality monitoring process, in addition to monitoring the medal shortage, the presence / absence of the inserted medal detection sensor 963 is also monitored based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection sensor 963. If specified, a main notification start command including information to that effect is set. The main notification start command is transmitted to the sub control device 800 by a command output process described later. The MPU 805 of the sub-control board 802 in the sub-control device 800 receives the main notification start command, thereby receiving the inserted medal detection sensor 963 via the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410. A notification that fraud has been performed is executed. When a notification canceling operation for an abnormality of the inserted medal detection sensor 963, for example, an operation of the reset switch 625 is detected, a main notification canceling command including information to that effect is set, and the main notification canceling command is set. Is transmitted to the sub-control device 800 in a command output process described later. The MPU 805 of the sub-control board 802 receives the main notification release command, thereby terminating the notification that is being made regarding the abnormality of the inserted medal detection sensor 963.

  In the subsequent step S106, a counter process for outputting the bet number of medals, the result of counting the number of payouts, etc. to the external concentration terminal board 900 is performed. In step S107, command output processing for outputting the commands set so far is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a main process executed after the power is turned on. The main process is executed when power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or by turning on the power switch 171.

  First, in step S201, initialization processing for executing various types of initialization is executed. In the subsequent step S202, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 626 and is turned ON, and more specifically, whether or not the ON signal is received from the setting key detection sensor 968 is determined. If the setting key has been turned ON, the process proceeds to step S203 to clear all data stored in the RAM 952 as a forced RAM clear process. In subsequent step S204, a winning probability setting process is performed.

  The winning probability setting process is a process for setting one winning probability among a plurality of (for example, six) winning probabilities set in advance in the slot machine 10. Specifically, each time the reset switch 625 is operated, the setting values in a plurality of stages are sequentially updated in the register of the MPU 621, the update result is displayed on a credit display unit (not shown), and the start lever 45 is displayed. When the setting key is turned OFF, the setting value stored in the register at that time is stored in the RAM 952. After executing the winning probability setting process in step S204, a normal process for performing main control relating to the game is executed in step S205.

  On the other hand, when it determines with the setting key not having been inserted in step S202, it progresses to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether or not the set value is normal. If the set value is normal, it is determined in step S207 whether a power failure flag is stored. If the power failure flag is stored, it is further confirmed in step S208 whether or not the RAM determination value is normal. If it is determined in step S208 that the RAM determination value is normal, power recovery processing is executed in step S209. In the power recovery process, a process for returning to the state before the occurrence of the power failure is executed. After that, it returns to the address before the power cut off.

  On the other hand, if any of step S206 to step S208 is NO, that is, the set value is abnormal, the power failure flag that is set when the power is shut off is not set, or the RAM determination value is abnormal, There is a high possibility that the data in the RAM 952 has been destroyed. In such a case, the operation prohibiting process shown in steps S210 to S212 is performed. As the operation prohibition process, first, the next timer interrupt process is prohibited in step S210, and in step S211, all the output ports in the input / output port are cleared to turn off all the actuators connected to the input / output port. To control. Thereafter, an error notification process is executed in step S212. In the error notification process, a RAM abnormality command is transmitted to the sub-control device 800, and the sub-control device 800 receives the RAM abnormality command, so that the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410 are used. To notify that a RAM abnormality has occurred. This operation prohibition state is maintained until the above-described winning probability setting process is performed.

  Next, normal processing for performing main control relating to the game will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S301, it is determined whether or not a medal is bet. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the start lever 45 has been operated. When the start lever 45 is operated in a situation where a medal is bet, processing for one game round after step S303 is executed.

  That is, in step S303, a lottery process is executed. In the lottery process, the random number value latched by the random number counter at the timing when the start lever 45 is operated and the information in the lottery table stored in advance in the ROM 951 of the main control board 620 are collated to win a predetermined role. If the predetermined combination is won, information to that effect is stored in the RAM 952.

  In subsequent step S304, reel control processing is executed. In the reel control process, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each of the reels 555, 556, and 557 is executed, and when any one of the stop switches 50, 51, and 52 is operated to generate a stop command, A reel stop process corresponding to the stop command is executed. At the time of this stop, if a predetermined combination is won in the lottery process in step S303, the rotation stop position of the reel is set so that the symbol corresponding to the selected combination stops on the effective line as much as possible. In addition, the reel rotation stop position is set so that a winning combination of a winning combination is not established.

  In subsequent step S305, a medal payout process is executed. In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning payable role is established on the active line. If a winning is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to the winning is paid out. In this manner, a process for driving the drive motor 194 is executed. Further, in the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not a re-game winning is established. If a re-game winning is established, the bet number in the current game round is continued in the next game round. Execute the process to make it.

  In subsequent step S306, bonus game processing is executed. In the bonus game process, it is determined whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning winning combination is established on the active line, and if the winning is established, the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the winning state (special A process for shifting to the gaming state is executed. Incidentally, the winning state is a gaming state in which the expected payout of medals per unit time is higher than in the normal gaming state. In the bonus game process, it is determined whether or not the winning condition end condition is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the gaming state is returned to the normal gaming state. In the slot machine 10, the end condition is that a predetermined reference number of medals are paid out, but the end condition is arbitrary.

  After executing the above steps S303 to S306, the process returns to step S301.

<Electrical configuration related to abnormality monitoring and monitoring result notification>
Next, an electrical configuration related to abnormality monitoring and monitoring result notification in the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 805 that controls the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410 is mounted on the sub control board 802 provided in the sub control device 800. The MPU 805 includes a ROM 981 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 805 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 981 is executed. A certain RAM 982 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  A power supply device 955 is connected to the MPU 805, and a DC 5 V power supply (operating power) is supplied from the power supply unit of the power supply device 955. The operating power is divided into at least two paths in the wiring pattern formed on the sub-control board 802. One path is connected to the VCC terminal of the MPU 805, and the other path is connected to the VBB terminal of the MPU 805. The MPU 805 executes various control programs with the operating power supplied via the VCC terminal, and stores and holds data in the RAM 982 with the operating power supplied via the VBB terminal.

  In this case, the sub-control board 802 is equipped with a power interruption unit 807 made of a backup capacitor or the like, and the power interruption unit 807 is connected to a path connected to the VBB terminal. Yes. The operating power supply unit 807 is charged while operating power is supplied from the power supply device 955 to the sub-control board 802, and the operation is discharged from the interrupting power supply unit 807 while the slot machine 10 is powered off. Power is supplied to the RAM 982. As a result, even when the power of the slot machine 10 is shut off, data is stored and held in the RAM 982 while the operating power is being supplied from the power supply unit for power interruption 807 to the RAM 982.

  The MPU 805 is provided with an input / output port. As described above, the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410 are connected to the output side of the MPU 805. A main controller 610 is connected to the input side of the MPU 805. The main control device 610 receives a production command and a notification command, and drives and controls the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410 in accordance with the contents of the received command. A monitoring control board 803 is connected to the output side and the input side of the MPU 805.

  The monitoring control board 803 is equipped with an MPU 811 that always executes predetermined monitoring for 24 hours within a range in which operating power is supplied to itself. The MPU 811 includes a ROM 991 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 811 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 991 is executed. A certain RAM 992 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  Further, the MPU 811 incorporates an RTC (real time clock) 993 as date and time measuring means. The RTC 993 is configured to be able to measure the date and time, and the MPU 811 can grasp the date and time at that time by acquiring information from the RTC 993.

  The MPU 811 is supplied with DC 5V power (operating power) generated by the power supply unit of the power supply device 955. In this case, the electrical connection between the monitoring control board 803 and the power supply unit of the power supply device 955 is not directly performed, and the operating power supplied to the sub control board 802 is the same as that in the sub control board 802. The divided operating power is supplied to the monitoring control board 803, and this operating power is supplied to the VCC terminal and the VBB terminal of the MPU 811. By supplying operating power to the monitoring control board 803 via the sub control board 802 in this way, a connector for electrically connecting the power supply device 955 to the monitoring control board 803 becomes unnecessary.

  The monitoring control board 803 is equipped with a power supply unit for power interruption 813 made of a Li secondary battery, and the power supply unit for power interruption 813 is connected to a path connected to the VCC terminal and the VBB terminal of the MPU 811. ing. While operating power is being supplied from the power supply device 955 via the sub-control board 802, the power supply unit 813 during power interruption is charged, and when the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off, the power supply unit 813 during power interruption is discharged. The operating power is supplied to the MPU 811. As a result, even when the power to the slot machine 10 is shut off, the MPU 811 executes various processes while operating power is being supplied from the power interruption unit 813 to the MPU 811. Note that the power supply unit 813 during power interruption of the monitoring control board 803 is not limited to the Li secondary battery, and a capacitor or the like may be used.

  Here, the MPU 811 is configured to operate not only with a DC 5V power supply (operating power) but also with a DC 3V power supply (operating power), and the power supply unit 813 for power interruption supplies the MPU 811 with a DC 3V power supply. To do. As described above, the MPU 811 can be operated by a power supply having a lower voltage than when the slot machine 10 is turned on, thereby reducing the power required for the MPU 811 to operate while the slot machine 10 is powered off. Is planned.

  In addition, a power supply monitoring unit 994 is mounted on the monitoring control board 803. The power supply monitoring unit 994 is a circuit for outputting a signal to that effect to the MPU 811 when a DC 5V power supply (operating power) generated in the power supply device 955 is supplied to the MPU 811. Specifically, the power supply monitoring unit 994 includes a resistor 994b connected to a wiring pattern 994a formed by branching from a path connected to the VCC terminal and the VBB terminal of the MPU 811. In a situation where the operating power thus supplied is supplied to the MPU 811, a low-current electric signal is input to the MPU 811 as a power-on signal. By receiving such an electrical signal, the MPU 811 can grasp that the operating power is supplied to the slot machine 10 itself, and confirm the rise of the electrical signal from the non-input state to the input state. It can be understood that the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself has started.

  The MPU 811 is provided with an input / output port. The power supply monitoring unit 994 is connected to the input side of the MPU 811. In addition to this, a hopper monitoring switch 230, a main controller monitoring switch 790, and an MPU 805 of the sub control board 802 are connected to the input side of the MPU 811. An MPU 805 of the sub control board 802 is connected to the output side of the MPU 811. Note that the communication between the MPU 805 and the MPU 811 is preferably performed by bidirectional serial communication or the like via a bidirectional communication line or the like.

  Incidentally, a signal path is formed between the various monitoring switches 230 and 790 and the MPU 811 to be a closed circuit when the various monitoring switches 230 and 790 are turned on. When the operating power is supplied to the MPU 811 itself, a monitoring result confirmation signal is always supplied. Therefore, when the operating power is supplied to the MPU 811 itself, various types of monitoring using the various types of monitoring switches 230 and 790 can always be performed.

  The MPU 811 constantly monitors the occurrence of various abnormalities in a situation where operating power is supplied to the power monitoring unit 994 and the various monitoring switches 230 and 790 based on the detection results of the power monitoring unit 994, and detects the occurrence of abnormalities in a predetermined period. When specified, the information is notified through the sub control board 802. In this case, the MPU 805 of the sub control board 802 performs notification through the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410. Specific contents of such monitoring and notification will be described later. In addition, the MPU 811 of the monitoring control board 803 cancels the situation where the notification is performed based on the operation of the setting switch 809 in the situation where the notification is performed through the sub-control board 802, the central lamp unit 26, and the like. To do. Specific contents of such monitoring and notification will be described later.

<Configuration for electrical connection>
Here, a configuration relating to electrical connection between the MPU 811 of the monitoring control board 803 and the various monitoring switches 230 and 790 will be described below.

  The electrical connection between the monitoring control board 803 and the various monitoring switches 230 and 790 is not made directly, and the electrical connection is made so that at least the sub-control board 802 relays. Specifically, a signal line for transmitting a signal between the MPU 811 and the various monitoring switches 230 and 790 and connected to the sub control device 800 is a signal line provided on the sub control board 802. Connected to the connector 808b. Further, on the sub control board 802, wiring patterns for electrically connecting the signal line connector 808b and the sub-side connector 808a are formed corresponding to the various monitoring switches 230 and 790. Also, on the monitoring control board 803, a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the monitoring side connector 814 connected to the sub-side connector 808a and the MPU 811 is formed corresponding to the various monitoring switches 230 and 790.

  By forming the signal path as described above, a connector for electrically connecting the various monitoring switches 230 and 790 on the monitoring control board 803 becomes unnecessary. Further, as already described, the monitoring control board 803 does not require a connector for electrical connection with the power supply device 955. That is, in this slot machine 10, the signal line connector to which the signal line for transmitting a signal to and from the external device in the sub control device 800 is not provided on the monitoring control board 803, and the sub control board 802. As a result, it is possible not to determine whether the signal line communicates with the MPU 805 of the sub control board 802 or the MPU 811 of the monitoring control board 803 only by looking at the signal line connector 808b of the sub control apparatus 800. .

  An opening 825 for exposing the signal line connector 808b to the outside is formed in the board box 804. A lead wire or the like is inserted into the board box 804 through the opening 825, and the monitor control board 803 or It is assumed that the user attempts to cheat the MPU 811 of the monitoring control board 803. On the other hand, since the signal line connector 808b is provided on the sub-control board 802, even if a lead wire or the like is inserted into the board box 804, the lead wire is connected to the monitoring control board 803 or the It becomes difficult to reach the MPU 811 of the monitoring control board 803.

  It is not essential that the signal line connectors 808b are integrated on the sub-control board 802 as described above, and may be integrated on the monitoring control board 803. In this case, the effect of the countermeasure against fraud with respect to the lead wire is reduced, but it can be determined whether the signal line communicates with the MPU 805 of the sub control board 802 or the MPU 811 of the monitoring control board 803. In addition, although the effect of countermeasures against improperness against the lead wires and the effect of difficulty in identifying the signal lines cannot occur, the signal line connectors may be provided on the sub control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803, respectively.

  Next, a configuration relating to a signal line that electrically connects the sub-control device 800 and a predetermined hopper monitoring switch 230 will be described below.

  Of the various monitoring switches 230, 790, the hopper monitoring switch 230 is not directly connected to the sub-control device 800, but their signal paths are relayed by the sub-side relay board 855. Further, not only the hopper monitoring switch 230 is a device whose signal path is relayed by the sub-side relay board 855, but also the signal path between the central lamp unit 26 and the speaker units 82 and 83 and the sub-control device 800 is the sub-side relay board. It is relayed by 855.

<Configuration of RAM 982 of Sub Control Board 802 and RAM 992 of Monitoring Control Board 803>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 982 of the sub control board 802 and the RAM 992 of the monitor control board 803 relating to abnormality monitoring and monitoring result notification will be described. 48A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a RAM 982 (hereinafter also referred to as a sub-side RAM 982) of the sub-control board 802, and FIG. 48B is a RAM 992 (hereinafter also referred to as a monitoring-side RAM 992) of the monitoring control board 803. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of say. In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding, the MPU 621 of the main control board 620 is referred to as the main MPU 621, the MPU 805 of the sub control board 802 is referred to as the sub MPU 805, and the MPU 811 of the monitoring control board 803 is referred to. This is called a monitoring side MPU 811.

  The sub-side RAM 982 has a main-side notification information storage area 985 for storing information to be referred to when notifying the occurrence of the abnormality when the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality is specified in the main-side MPU 621, and monitoring A monitoring-side notification information storage area 986 for storing information to be referred to when notification of the occurrence of the abnormality is specified in the side MPU 811. The secondary RAM 982 is used to specify that the secondary MPU 805 is in a predetermined state in the secondary counter MPU 805 and the measurement counter area 987 that is used to measure the timing for executing predetermined processing. Various flag storage areas 988 are provided.

The monitoring RAM 992 includes a constant monitoring history storage area 1001 and a notification monitoring history storage area 1002. As described above, the monitoring side MPU 811 monitors the occurrence of various abnormalities based on the detection results of the power supply monitoring unit 994 and the various monitoring switches 230 and 790. In this case, as an event to be monitored,
(1) Power ON operation of the slot machine 10 itself (2) Movement of the hopper device 180 from the installation location (3) Three types of movement of the main controller 610 from the installation location are set.

  Two types of monitoring result storage methods are set, and one of them always stores the monitoring results of all the events (1) to (3) in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the monitoring MPU 811 itself. Monitoring. Information on the monitoring result is output to the hall management device or the like via the external concentration terminal board 900, so that the manager or the like of the game hall can check at any time.

  On the other hand, in the monitoring period for notification set by the manager of the game hall, etc., the monitoring results of the above events (1) and (2) are stored, and operating power is supplied to the monitoring MPU 811 itself In the monitoring for information, the monitoring result of the event (3) is stored. In this case, the notification monitoring period can be set to any period of 24 hours. Basically, the operating power is not supplied to the slot machine 10 itself, specifically from the manufacturer of the slot machine 10 or the like. A period during transfer to the game hall and a period during which the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is stopped while the game hall is closed are designated. When information on the monitoring result is acquired during the notification monitoring period, a predetermined notification is executed when the slot machine 10 is powered on.

  Here, among the events to be monitored of (1) to (3) above, by monitoring the event of (1) power ON operation while the power to the slot machine 10 is shut off, the setting change of the winning probability is illegal. It can be monitored whether it has been done or not. This is because the setting key needs to be turned on when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on as described above in order to change the setting of the corresponding selection probability. Further, by monitoring the above events (2) and (3) while the power is shut down, it is possible to monitor whether or not fraud has been performed on the devices to be monitored.

  Of the continuous monitoring history storage area 1001 and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002, the continuous monitoring history storage area 1001 is used for performing continuous monitoring, and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 is used for performing monitoring for notification. Used in The continuous monitoring history storage area 1001 is configured as a ring buffer, and an event data area for storing the type of event that occurred among the above events (1) to (3), and the event has occurred. The date / time data area for storing the date / time is set as a set of unit areas, and a plurality of sets (specifically, 15 sets) of the unit areas are provided.

  Further, the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 is configured as a ring buffer, and stores information about an event data area, a date / time data area, and whether or not a notification cancellation condition is satisfied for the event. The notification determination data area is set as a set of unit areas, and a plurality of sets (specifically, 15 sets) of the unit areas are provided.

  In the constant monitoring history storage area 1001 and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002, the number of unit areas is the same, and is set larger than the number of events to be monitored. Then, the events (1) to (3) are stored in order of date and time (in chronological order), and the oldest event is erased when the number exceeds the unit area. In this case, the constant monitoring history storage area 1001 and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 are configured as ring buffers as described above, and are determined depending on the position of the write pointer for specifying the unit area to be written next time. It is specified which unit area is the unit area in which the newest data is stored and the unit area in which the oldest data is stored. The number of unit areas does not have to be the same in the regular monitoring history storage area 1001 and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002, and may be different.

  The monitoring RAM 992 includes a measurement counter area 1003 used for measuring the timing for executing predetermined processing in the monitoring MPU 811 in addition to the constant monitoring history storage area 1001 and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002. A display data setting area 1004 in which display data of an image displayed on the display screen 410a of the liquid crystal display device 410 is set, and a notification for storing information of a notification monitoring period in performing the notification monitoring. Monitoring period storage area 1005 and various flag storage areas 1006 used for specifying that the monitoring side MPU 811 is in a predetermined state.

  The monitoring history storage areas 1001 and 1002 described above are configured to collectively store the events (1) to (3), but the storage areas corresponding to the events (1) to (3). May be provided individually.

<Processing executed by the monitoring MPU 811>
Next, processing executed by the sub-MPU 805 and the monitoring MPU 811 for monitoring an abnormality and notifying a monitoring result will be described. In the following description, for the sake of convenience of explanation, processing executed by the monitoring side MPU 811 will be described first with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 49 to 53, and then the sub-side with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 to 57. Processing executed by the MPU 805 will be described.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the monitoring side MPU 811.

  The normal process is started periodically (specifically, 4 msec). In the normal processing, monitoring processing is executed in step S401, time setting processing is executed in step S402, abnormality notification setting processing is executed in step S403, and abnormality notification cancellation processing is executed in step S404. After that, the normal process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, each process of the said step S401-step S404 is demonstrated concretely.

<Monitoring process of monitoring MPU 811>
First, the monitoring process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the monitoring process specifies whether or not the above events (1) to (3) have occurred based on the detection results of the power supply monitoring unit 994 and the various monitoring switches 230 and 790. When an event has occurred, the information is stored (written or stored) in the constant monitoring history storage area 1001 and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002.

  In the monitoring process, it is first determined in step S501 whether it is time to monitor the input side of the input / output port. This timing is set to be executed once every elapse of the monitoring time, that is, periodically every monitoring period. Specifically, it is configured to be executed once every 0.5 sec, and the timing is the elapsed time from the timing of the previous monitoring using the monitoring counter area 1003 of the monitoring RAM 992. In detail, this is performed by measuring the number of negative determinations made in step S501. In the slot machine 10, normal processing is started at a cycle of 4 msec. Therefore, in step S 501, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitoring counter area is “125”.

  Note that the period of monitoring is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary. However, from the viewpoint of monitoring the occurrence of abnormality without omission, it is preferable to perform the monitoring once every N (0 <N <1) sec. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with the irregular update function (irregular update means) which can change the period which performs this monitoring irregularly. In this case, it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts in accordance with the monitoring cycle. In addition, since a relatively long cycle is set as a part of a cycle that can be set irregularly, the number of monitoring executions per unit time can be suppressed, and accordingly, the power supply unit 813 for power interruption can be controlled. Power consumption is reduced.

  If it is not the monitoring timing, a negative determination is made in step S501, and after updating the monitoring counter area in step S503, specifically, after the monitoring counter area is incremented by 1, this monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the monitoring timing, an affirmative determination is made in step S501, and after the monitoring counter area is initialized in step S502, specifically, after the monitoring counter area is cleared to “0”, step S504 is performed. Proceed to

  In step S504, the detection result of the power supply monitoring unit 994 and the various monitoring switches 230 and 790 is specified by reading information on the input side of the input / output port. Specifically, the information on the port to which the detection result of the power monitoring unit 994 for monitoring the power ON operation of the slot machine 10 itself, which is the event (1), is “0”, which is the power OFF information. It is determined whether or not the information has been switched to information “1”, which is power ON information. In addition, the information on the port to which the detection result of the hopper monitoring switch 230 for monitoring the movement of the hopper device 180 from the installation location, which is the event of (2) above, is “0” information that is hopper installation information. It is determined whether or not it has been switched to information “1” which is hopper removal information. The information on the port to which the detection result of the main control device monitoring switch 790 for monitoring the movement of the main control device 610 from the installation location, which is the event (3), is main control device installation information. It is determined whether the information “0” has been switched to the information “1”, which is main controller removal information.

  In order to make it difficult to identify the occurrence of an abnormality when “1” is stored in the port due to the occurrence of noise, in step S504, “1” is stored from the situation where “0” is stored. When the situation is confirmed continuously a plurality of times, it may be specified that an abnormality of the event has occurred. Further, the relationship of “0” and “1” may be set to an opposite relationship.

  If none of the above events (1) to (3) has occurred, a negative determination is made in step S504, and the present monitoring process is terminated as it is. If any of the above events (1) to (3) has occurred, an affirmative determination is made in step S504, and the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, a content specifying process for specifying the content of the event specified as occurring this time is executed, and the specified content is stored in the register of the monitoring side MPU 811.

  In a succeeding step S506, it is determined whether or not the same event as the event specified in the step S505 is stored in the continuous monitoring history storage area 1001. If the same event is not stored, the process proceeds to step S508. If the same event is stored, it is determined in step S507 whether or not it is during the write prohibition period (during the storage prevention period). Specifically, the date and time of occurrence of the same event already stored in the constant monitoring history storage area 1001 is grasped, and the current date and time is grasped from the RTC 993. Then, it is determined whether or not the latter elapsed period relative to the former corresponds to a write prohibition period stored in advance in the ROM 991 of the monitoring control board 803. The write-inhibit period is set as 1 minute, but the specific period is arbitrary.

  If it is during the write prohibition period, the monitoring process is terminated as it is without writing the event specified this time in both the constant monitoring history storage area 1001 and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002. When monitoring anomalies, it is important that the management of the game hall, etc. can identify which of the above events (1) to (3) has occurred, and it is the same It is not important whether or not this event has been done several times in a short period of time. In this case, in the situation where the storage capacity of the regular monitoring history storage area 1001 and the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 is limited, the former specification can be made by setting the write prohibition period as described above. Can be prioritized, and monitoring can be performed well.

  Instead of providing a write prohibition period, the monitoring MPU 811 does not execute the monitoring process of the input / output ports until the predetermined non-monitoring period (memory prevention period) has passed for the monitoring switch in which the monitoring target event is specified. It is good also as a structure. In other words, when the same monitored event is repeated a plurality of times within the storage prevention period, they are not stored in the continuous monitoring history storage area 1001 or the notification monitoring history storage area 1002, but are stored multiple times. If it is the structure which collects and memorize | stores as 1 time, the specific control content is arbitrary. In addition, as long as the above-described overlapping writing is allowed, a configuration in which a storage prevention period such as a write prohibition period or a non-monitoring period is not set may be employed.

  If it is not during the write prohibition period, a negative determination is made in step S507, and the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, the regular monitoring history update process is executed. Specifically, a write pointer update process is first executed. As a result, among the plurality of unit areas in the constant monitoring history storage area 1001, the unit area in which the information on the oldest monitoring result is stored becomes the information writing target. Then, the event information specified this time is stored in the event data area in the unit area corresponding to the write pointer, and the current date and time information read from the RTC 993 is stored in the date and time data area.

  Incidentally, it is assumed that a plurality of types of events occur at the same time. However, in the regular monitoring history update process, these types of events are sequentially stored. In such an update, the update is executed in accordance with a predetermined priority order among the above (1) to (3). In this case, the movement of the main control device 610 from the installation location of (3) is given top priority, and when the event and other events occur simultaneously, the movement of the main control device 610 is regarded as the newest event. It is good also as a structure memorize | stored.

  In a succeeding step S509, it is determined whether or not the current time point is in the monitoring period for notification. Specifically, the current time is read from the RTC 993, and it is determined whether or not the read time is included in the notification monitoring period stored in the notification monitoring period storage area 1005 of the monitoring side RAM 992. If it is included in the notification monitoring period, a notification condition establishment flag (notification condition establishment information storage means) is provided in the notification condition establishment flag storage area (notification condition establishment information storage means) provided in various flag storage areas 1006 of the monitoring side RAM 992 in step S510. Notification condition establishment information) is stored.

  Here, in the present slot machine 10, when any of the above events (1) to (3) occurs during the notification monitoring period, it is predetermined when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on as described above. However, the predetermined notification is executed when the notification condition establishment flag is stored (stored). In other words, the notification condition establishment flag is a flag for specifying that the monitoring side MPU 811 should execute a predetermined notification.

  In a succeeding step S511, a notification monitoring history update process is executed. Specifically, a write pointer update process is first executed. Thereby, the area in which the information of the oldest monitoring result is stored among the plurality of areas in the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 becomes the information writing target. Then, information on the event specified this time is stored in the event data area in the area corresponding to the write pointer, and information on the current date and time read from the RTC 993 is stored in the date and time data area. Further, “1” as unreleased information is stored in the notification determination data area. Thereafter, the monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the current time point is not included in the monitoring period for notification, the process proceeds to step S512, and whether or not the event specified this time is an event of movement of the main controller 610 from the installation location of (3) above. Determine whether. If it is not the event, the monitoring process is terminated as it is. If it is the event, the notification condition establishment flag is stored in step S510, and the notification monitoring history update processing is executed in step S511, and then the monitoring processing is terminated.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, when the movement from the installation location of the main controller 610 is specified in a situation that is not the write prohibition period, the information is for notification regardless of whether it is during the notification monitoring period. It is stored in the monitoring history storage area 1002. The main control device 610 has a function for controlling the main game such as a lottery processing function and a medal payout processing function, and there is a possibility of causing a great disadvantage to the game hall if fraud is performed. It is easy to become a target of fraud. In this case, the movement from the installation location of the main control device 610 is stored in the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 as a notification target regardless of whether or not it is the notification monitoring period. Can be monitored with emphasis on fraud. Also, not all events are subject to notification regardless of whether they are in the monitoring period for notification, but only the events related to the main control device 610 are subject to notification as described above, so that the monitoring history for notification is provided. Although the event related to the main control device 610 is stored in the limited storage capacity of the storage area 1002, the opening of the front door 12 or the like is repeatedly performed before the event related to the main control device 610 is notified. It is possible to prevent the event from being erased. Similarly, the movement from the installation location of the hopper device 180 can be stored in the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 as a notification target regardless of whether or not it is in the notification monitoring period. .

<Processing for setting time etc. of monitoring MPU 811>
Next, the time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the time setting process is a process for notifying the RTC 993 in a situation where it is necessary to set the date and time, a process for setting the date and time measured by the RTC 993, and a monitoring for notification. This is a process for executing a process for setting a period.

  In the time setting process, first, in step S601, based on information input from the power supply monitoring unit 994 on the input side of the input / output port, it is determined whether operating power is supplied to the slot machine 10 itself. To do. When the operating power is not supplied to the slot machine 10 itself, the setting of the date and time of the RTC 993 and the setting of the monitoring period for notification cannot be performed.

  If the operating power is supplied to the slot machine 10 itself, it is determined in step S602 whether or not data erasure of the monitoring RAM 992 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data erasure monitoring flag (data erasure monitoring information) is stored in the data erasure monitoring flag storage area (data erasure monitoring information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 1006 of the monitoring side RAM 992. .

  The data erasure monitoring flag is not stored immediately after the slot machine 10 is shipped. In this case, there is a high possibility that the date and time of the RTC 993 is not accurate. Further, even if the data erasure monitoring flag is stored once, the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is stopped for a long time, and the power supply unit 813 for power interruption 813 of the monitoring control board 803 is maintained. As a result, the operating power required to store and hold data in the monitoring RAM 992 is erased when the power supply unit 813 is not discharged. In the situation where the operating power necessary for updating the date and time in the RTC 993 is not discharged from the power supply unit 813 during interruption, the operating power necessary for storing and holding data in the monitoring RAM 992 is not supplied. It is comprised so that. Therefore, when the data deletion flag is deleted, there is a high possibility that the date and time of the RTC 993 is not accurate. On the other hand, the data erasure monitoring flag is stored when the setting of the date and time of the RTC 993 is completed. That is, the data erasure monitoring flag is a flag for identifying in the monitoring side MPU 811 that there is a high possibility that the date and time of the RTC 993 is not accurate.

  If the data erasure monitoring flag is not stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S602, and an erasure notification start command for starting notification for prompting the setting of the date and time of the RTC 993 is sent to the sub MPU 805 in step S603. Execute the process to send. As a result, a predetermined process is executed in the sub-MPU 805 so that notification for prompting the setting of the date and time of the RTC 993 is executed on the display screen 410a of the liquid crystal display device 410. After executing the process of step S603, or when a data erasure monitoring flag is stored and a negative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, it is determined whether the date / time of the RTC 993 is being set. If the RTC 993 date / time is being set, a date / time setting process in step S608 described later is executed. If the RTC 993 date / time is not being set, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether the monitoring period for notification is being set. If the notification monitoring period is being set, a notification monitoring period setting process in step S614, which will be described later, is executed. If the notification monitoring period is not being set, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion unit 626 and the setting key is turned on. In this case, the information indicating whether or not the ON operation is performed is transmitted from the main MPU 621 and is received by the monitoring MPU 811 via the sub MPU 805, but is not limited thereto. The detection result of the setting key detection sensor 968 may be directly input to the monitoring side MPU 811.

  If the setting key is not turned on for the setting key insertion unit 626, the process is not performed without executing the process for setting the date and time of the RTC 993 and the process for setting the monitoring period for notification. The setting process ends. In other words, the slot machine 10 is configured to perform key operations using predetermined keys possessed by the manager of the game hall when setting the date and time of the RTC 993 or setting the monitoring period for notification. Thereby, setting of the date and time of the RTC 993 and the setting of the monitoring period for notification are suppressed by an unauthorized person.

  When the setting key is turned on for the setting key insertion unit 626, an input is made from the setting switch 809 (see FIG. 47) provided on the sub control board 802 of the sub control device 800 in step S607. Based on the stored information, it is determined whether or not the RTC 993 date / time setting operation has been performed. If the RTC 993 date / time setting operation has been performed, date / time setting processing is executed in step S608. In FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, the setting switch 809 is omitted.

  In the date / time setting process, the date / time changing operation by operating the various switches 50 to 52 and the start lever 45 of the front door 12 is enabled based on the information input from the setting switch, and corresponding to these changing operations. The information measured by the RTC 993 is updated so as to be the date and time that has been set. In the operation for starting the setting of the date and time and the operation for changing the date and time, a display change process to be described later is displayed so that an image corresponding to each is displayed on the display screen 410a of the liquid crystal display device 410. The control device 415 is controlled. Incidentally, the operation unit for changing the date and time is not limited to the switch 50 or the like. For example, a switch for changing settings may be provided separately.

  After the date / time setting process is executed, it is determined in step S609 whether the date / time setting is completed. Specifically, based on the information input from the setting switch 809, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting completion operation has been performed. If the date and time setting has not been completed, the setting process is terminated.

  If the date and time setting has been completed, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the data erasure monitoring flag is stored in the monitoring side RAM 992. If the data erasure monitoring flag is stored, the setting process is terminated. If the data erasure monitoring flag is not stored, the data erasure monitoring flag is stored in step S611, and the erasure notification end command for ending the notification that prompts the user to set the date and time of the RTC 993 in step S612. Is transmitted to the sub MPU 805. Thereafter, the processing for setting this time and the like is terminated.

  Here, in a situation where the data erasure monitoring flag is not stored, the data erasure monitoring flag is not stored until the date and time setting is completed, whereby the RTC date and time setting operation is performed by the game hall manager. Until this is done, it is basically possible to make a notification that prompts the operation.

  On the other hand, if the setting key is turned on to the setting key insertion unit 626 and the date and time setting operation is not performed, the information input from the setting switch 809 in step S613. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not a notification monitoring period setting operation has been performed. When the notification monitoring period setting operation is not performed, the setting process is terminated. When the notification monitoring period setting operation is performed, the notification monitoring period setting process is executed in step S614, and then the setting process ends.

  In the notification monitoring period setting process, based on the information input from the setting switch 809, the monitoring monitoring of the monitoring RAM 992 is performed so that the notification monitoring period becomes a period corresponding to the operation of the setting switch 809. Information in the period storage area 1005 is updated.

<Monitoring MPU 811 Abnormality Notification Setting Process>
Next, the abnormality notification setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the abnormality notification setting process is a process for performing a setting for starting abnormality notification when an abnormality notification execution condition is satisfied at the abnormality notification start timing.

  In the abnormality notification setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether a request command is received from the sub MPU 805 or not. The request command is a command transmitted from the sub MPU 805 when supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is started and the operation of the sub MPU 805 is started. Detailed conditions for transmitting the request command will be described later. If the request command has not been received, a negative determination is made in step S701, and the setting processing is terminated as it is. If a request command has been received, an affirmative determination is made in step S701, and the process proceeds to step S702.

  In step S702, it is determined whether a notification condition establishment flag is stored in the monitoring RAM 992. As described above, the notification condition establishment flag is not related to whether the event (1) or (2) occurs during the notification monitoring period or whether the event is in the notification monitoring period ( This flag is stored when the event 3) occurs. That is, in step S702, it is determined whether or not an event to be notified has occurred.

  When the notification condition establishment flag is stored, the notification start processing in steps S703 to S705 is executed, and then the setting processing ends. Specifically, in step S703, the notification execution flag (notification execution information) is stored in the notification execution flag storage area (notification executing information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 1006 of the monitoring RAM 992. By storing the notification execution flag, the monitoring side MPU 811 can specify that the notification is being executed or that the notification should be executed.

  In a succeeding step S704, a notification content specifying process is executed. Specifically, an area where the notification release condition is not satisfied in each unit area of the notification monitoring history storage area 1002, specifically, an area where “1” as unreleased information is stored as notification determination data. The event to be monitored is identified from the events (1) to (3) from the event data of the specified area. In this case, when a plurality of types of events are to be notified, they are specified individually. However, in step S704, when a plurality of events of the same type are stored in the notification monitoring history storage area 1002, they are not specified individually and the events occur without considering the number of occurrences. Only to be identified.

  In a succeeding step S705, a process of transmitting a notification-present command including information on the event specified in the step S704 to the sub MPU 805 is executed. The notification presence command is stored in advance in the ROM 991 of the monitoring control board 803, and the notification presence command is set in a one-to-one correspondence with all patterns specified as notification targets. By receiving the notification presence command, the sub MPU 805 identifies from the notification presence command that a monitored event has occurred and the type of the event. Note that the command with notification is sent in response to the request command received in the situation where the monitored event occurs, the command with notification is the response command in the situation where the monitored event occurs It can be said that.

  On the other hand, when the notification condition establishment flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S702, and the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, a process of transmitting a no-notification command for causing the sub-MPU 805 to grasp that no monitored event has occurred is executed. Thereafter, the setting process is terminated. By receiving the no-notification command, the sub-side MPU 805 specifies from the no-notification command that no monitored event has occurred. Note that when there is no monitored event, a notification-less command is transmitted in response to receiving a request command. A notification-less command is a response command in a situation where a monitored event has not occurred. It is.

<Monitoring MPU 811 Abnormality Notification Canceling Process>
Next, the abnormality notification canceling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the abnormality notification canceling process is a process for performing a setting for canceling the abnormality notification when a condition for canceling the abnormality notification is satisfied in a situation where the abnormality notification is being executed.

  In the abnormality notification canceling process, it is first determined in step S801 whether the notification is being restricted. Here, in the slot machine 10, as notification types to be executed based on the processing in the sub MPU 805, notification for the abnormality specified by the main MPU 621, notification for the abnormality specified by the monitoring MPU 811, In addition, notification regarding communication abnormality of the monitoring side MPU 811 and notification for prompting the setting of the date and time of the RTC 993 of the monitoring side MPU 811 are set.

  In this case, in order to prevent the inconvenience that the management of the game hall or the like cannot understand what is being notified among these various notifications, priorities are set in advance for the plurality of types of notifications. If the notification timing overlaps, it is executed step by step. In detail, the notification for the abnormality identified by the main MPU 621 has the highest priority, the notification for the abnormality identified by the monitoring MPU 811 has the second highest priority, and the monitoring MPU 811 performs communication. Notification for abnormality is set to have the next highest priority, and notification that prompts the monitoring MPU 811 to set the date and time of the RTC 993 has the lowest priority.

  In the configuration in which the priority is set as described above, “notifying notification” means that the notification for the abnormality specified by the main MPU 621 having the highest priority is being executed. means. Whether or not such notification restriction is in effect is determined by whether or not the notification restriction flag (notification restriction information) is stored (stored) in the notification restriction flag storage area (notification restriction information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 1006 of the monitoring side RAM 992. This is done by determining whether or not.

  If the notification is not being restricted, a negative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is determined whether a notification restriction start command is received from the sub MPU 805. The notification restriction start command is a command transmitted from the sub MPU 805 when the sub MPU 805 starts the notification with the highest priority. If the notification restriction start command is received, the notification restriction flag is stored in step S803, and then the release processing is terminated. If the notification restriction start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S806.

  On the other hand, if the notification is being restricted, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, it is determined whether a notification restriction end command has been received from the sub MPU 805. The notification restriction end command is a command transmitted from the sub MPU 805 when the sub MPU 805 ends the notification with the highest priority. When the notification restriction end command has not been received, the release processing is ended as it is. If the notification restriction end command has been received, the notification restriction flag is deleted in step S805, and then the process proceeds to step S806.

  In step S806, it is determined whether or not a notification execution flag is stored in the monitoring RAM 992. If the notification execution flag is not stored, the abnormality notification is not being executed, and thus the cancellation process is terminated. If the notification execution flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S807.

  In step S807, an operation system signal reading process is executed. Specifically, the input side at the input / output port of the monitoring side MPU 811 is monitored to determine whether or not the setting switch is operated. In a succeeding step S808, it is determined whether or not the result specified in the step S807 is a result corresponding to the release operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 809 has been pressed (for example, 5 seconds). If the setting switch 809 has not been pressed for a long time, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the release processing ends as it is. In addition, you may provide the operation part for performing cancellation | release operation separately.

  If the setting switch 809 has been pressed for a long time, the notification execution flag is erased from the monitoring side RAM 992 in step S809. Thereby, on the display screen 410a of the liquid crystal display device 410, information indicating that the release operation has been performed is displayed as an image. For example, on the display screen 410a, an image of characters “KAIJOSALE MASHITA” is displayed.

  In a succeeding step S810, a process of transmitting a monitoring side notification release command to the sub MPU 805 is executed. By receiving the monitoring side notification release command, the sub-side MPU 805 grasps that the release operation has been made effective for the notification for the abnormality identified by the monitoring side MPU 811 during the notification monitoring period. Exit.

  In a succeeding step S811, it is determined whether or not it is a release permission situation. Specifically, by referring to the information of the write pointer, the unit area in which the latest monitored event is stored among the unit areas of the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 is specified. The information stored in the date / time data area is read out as the latest occurrence date / time information. In addition, an addition process for adding information of a re-notification period (for example, 3 hours) stored in advance in the ROM 991 of the monitoring control board 803 is performed on the read latest occurrence date and time information. Then, information on the current date and time is read from the RTC 993, and it is determined whether or not the date and time of the result of the addition process is before the current date and time. As a result, if the date and time of the result of the above addition processing is before the current date and time (3 hours have passed since the latest event), it is determined that the release is permitted, and the date and time is not before the current date and time. Is determined not to be in a release-permitted state.

  It should be noted that the specific processing content for determining whether or not it is a release permission status is not limited to the above, but is stored in the date / time data area of the unit area corresponding to the latest information. Whether the date and time after the re-notification period has passed before the current date and time of the current RTC 993, in other words, the current date and time of the RTC 993 is the date and time of the unit area corresponding to the latest information It is arbitrary as long as it is possible to determine whether the date / time after the re-notification period has elapsed from the date / time stored in the data area. For example, a subtraction process for subtracting the information of the re-notification period stored in the ROM 991 from the grasped current date and time information of the RTC 993 is executed. And it is also possible to perform a comparison process for determining whether the date and time of information stored in the date and time data area of the unit area corresponding to the latest information is before the date and time of the result of the subtraction process. Good.

  Instead of using the RTC 993, a time measurement counter area may be provided in the monitoring RAM 992, and the re-notification period may be measured using a value counted in the time measurement counter area. In addition, when providing a time measurement counter area in this way, the counter area is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each unit area of the notification monitoring history storage area 1002, and information on events to be monitored is provided in these unit areas. A value corresponding to the re-notification period is stored in the counter area corresponding to the storage. Each counter area may be subtracted at a constant period, and a unit area having a counter area value of “0” may be determined to be in a release-permitted state.

  If it is determined in step S811 that the cancel-permitted status is not reached, the cancel processing is terminated as it is. In this case, although the notification execution flag is deleted from the monitoring side RAM 992, the notification condition establishment flag is not deleted. Therefore, when the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is started next time, the abnormality notification that has been released this time is canceled. The abnormality notification is started again based on the monitoring target event.

  If it is determined in step S811 that the release permission status is set, the notification condition establishment flag in the monitoring side RAM 992 is deleted in step S812. In step S813, notification determination data update processing is executed. In the update process, the unit area in which the notification release condition is not satisfied in each unit area of the notification monitoring history storage area 1002, specifically, a unit in which “1” as unreleased information is stored as notification determination data. Identify the area. Then, for the specified unit areas, the notification determination data area is cleared to “0” so that the unreleased information is deleted. Thereafter, the cancellation processing is terminated. As a result, the state in which the notification condition is established based on the monitoring target event related to the current abnormality notification is canceled, and the operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is reduced unless a new monitoring target event occurs. Even if the supply is started, the notification based on the monitoring process of the monitoring side MPU 811 is not started.

  That is, in this slot machine 10, as already described, when it is specified that a monitored event has occurred in the monitoring MPU 811 during the notification monitoring period, the operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is reduced. When the supply is started, the abnormality notification is started (described above with reference to FIG. 52). In this case, even if the abnormality notification is canceled before the re-notification period (for example, 3 hours) elapses from the date and time when the latest monitored event occurs, the abnormality notification is executed at that time. However, when the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is started, the abnormality notification is started again with the same event as the cause of the notification occurrence. That is, when the abnormality notification execution condition is satisfied, the abnormality notification execution condition is satisfied unless a release operation is performed after the re-notification period has elapsed from the date and time when the latest monitored event occurred. In the situation where the state is maintained, the abnormality notification is started every time the abnormality notification start timing is reached.

  Incidentally, the notification execution condition and the start condition for the abnormality specified by the monitoring side MPU 811 are satisfied by not performing the processing after step S806 when the notification is being restricted as described above. In the situation where the notification for the abnormality identified by the main MPU 621 is prioritized, even if the notification release operation for the abnormality identified by the monitoring MPU 811 is executed, it is invalidated. Accordingly, in order to cancel the establishment of the notification execution condition and the start condition for the abnormality identified by the monitoring side MPU 811, it is necessary to perform a cancellation operation in a situation where the notification is being executed, and the notification monitoring period When an event to be monitored occurs in the monitoring side MPU 811, a notification to that effect can be reliably executed.

<Normal processing executed by the sub MPU 805>
Next, processing executed by the sub MPU 805 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the sub MPU 805.

  The normal process is started periodically (specifically, 4 msec). In the normal process, an effect setting process is executed in step S1001. In the effect setting process, when an effect command is received from the main MPU 621, an effect corresponding to the effect command is performed by the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410. Execute the process. For example, in the effect command, information indicating that light emission from the central lamp unit 26, sound output from the speaker units 82 and 83, and display of a predetermined image on the display screen 410a of the liquid crystal display device 410 are started at a predetermined timing. Is included, the output of a predetermined drive signal to each of the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410 is started at the predetermined timing. In addition, when performing abnormality notification described later, these abnormality notifications have priority. In the subsequent step S1002, a normal abnormality notification setting process is executed.

<Subordination MPU 805 Normal Abnormality Notification Setting Process>
Here, normal abnormality notification setting processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the normal abnormality notification setting process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not a main notification start command is received based on information input from the main MPU 621 on the input side of the input / output port. To do. If the command has not been received, the setting process is terminated as it is.

  If the command has been received, an abnormality content identification process is executed in step S1102. In the abnormality content identification process, what information is to be started this time is identified from the abnormality content information included in the main notification start command. As the abnormality content, for example, a medal shortage of the hopper device 180 or a detection abnormality in the inserted medal detection sensor 963 is set. The information specified here is stored (stored or updated) in the main notification information storage area 985 of the sub RAM 982.

  In the subsequent step S1103, whether or not the monitoring side abnormality notification flag (monitoring side abnormality notification information) is stored in the monitoring side abnormality notification flag storage area (monitoring side abnormality notification information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 988 of the sub RAM 982 is determined. Determine whether. The monitoring-side abnormality notification flag is stored when it is specified in the sub-side MPU 805 that an event to be monitored occurred during the notification monitoring period based on a command received from the monitoring-side MPU 811. This flag is cleared when a valid release operation is performed.

  If the monitoring side abnormality notification flag is stored, in step S1104, the notification standby flag (notification standby information) is stored in the notification standby flag storage area (notification standby information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 988 of the sub-side RAM 982. Is stored. Here, as already described, priorities are set in advance for the various notifications executed based on the processing in the sub MPU 805, and the main MPU 621 is compared with the notification for the abnormality identified by the monitoring MPU 811. The notification for the specified abnormality is set with a high priority. Therefore, even when the monitoring-side abnormality notification flag is stored and the notification execution condition for the abnormality specified by the monitoring-side MPU 811 is satisfied, the notification for the abnormality specified by the main-side MPU 621 is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the notification for the abnormality specified by the main MPU 621 is executed regardless of whether the notification for the abnormality specified by the monitoring MPU 811 is before execution or is being executed. The execution of the notification for the abnormality identified by the monitoring side MPU 811 is on standby. In a situation where this standby is performed, a notification standby flag is stored, and the notification standby flag is erased by releasing the standby.

  After storing the notification standby flag in step S1104, or if a negative determination is made in step S1103, main side abnormality notification is started in step S1105. At the start, the notification content is specified based on the information stored in the main notification information storage area 985 of the secondary RAM 982, and the notification of the specified content is the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal. These devices are controlled so as to be executed by the display device 410. Even if other notifications and effects are already being executed, the notification is interrupted and the main-side abnormality notification is started.

  As the notification content described above, for example, when the power-on operation of the slot machine 10 itself and the movement of the main control device 610 are specified as an event to be monitored, the display screen 113 displays “Keihou: Dengen, Kiban”. An image of the characters is displayed.

  Note that the contents of the monitoring history notification are not limited to those described above, and an image indicating the occurrence date and time of the event may be displayed together with an image indicating that the event has occurred. In addition, when there are a plurality of areas where the notification release condition is not satisfied, a combination of an image indicating the monitored event stored in each area and an image indicating the date and time of occurrence of the event is set for each area. A configuration may be adopted in which switching display is performed sequentially.

  In subsequent step S1106, the main-side abnormality notification flag (main-side abnormality notification information) is stored in the main-side abnormality notification flag storage area (main-side abnormality notification information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 988 of the sub-side RAM 982. Whether or not the main-side abnormality notification is being performed in the sub-side MPU 805 can be specified by the main-side abnormality notification flag. In subsequent step S1107, a notification restriction start command, which is information for causing the monitoring side MPU 811 to recognize that the main side abnormality notification is being performed, is transmitted to the monitoring side MPU 811. The processing content executed by the monitoring side MPU 811 by receiving the notification restriction start command is as described above. Thereafter, the setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 54), after the normal abnormality notification setting process is executed in step S1002, it is determined in step S1003 whether a response is waiting or a notification is waited. Whether or not the notification standby is in progress is determined by determining whether or not the notification standby flag is stored in the secondary RAM 982. On the other hand, whether or not the response is waiting is determined based on whether the response waiting flag (response waiting information) is stored in the response waiting flag storage area (response waiting information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 988 of the secondary RAM 982. This is done by determining whether it is stored. The response waiting flag is stored when a request command is transmitted from the sub MPU 805 to the monitoring MPU 811 while a response command from the monitoring MPU 811 is waiting. This flag is deleted when it is released.

  If it is either waiting for response or waiting for notification, the process proceeds to step S1005. On the other hand, if it is neither waiting for response nor waiting for notification, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not it is immediately after power-on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a startup flag (startup information) is stored in the startup flag storage area (startup information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 988 of the secondary RAM 982. The start-up flag is a flag that is stored when the supply of operating power to the sub MPU 805 is started, and is erased when a request command is transmitted from the sub MPU 805 to the monitoring MPU 811. If it is immediately after the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1005. If it is not immediately after the power is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1006 without executing step S1005. In step S1005, an abnormality notification setting process at startup is executed.

<Abnormality notification setting process at startup of sub MPU 805>
Here, the abnormality notification setting process at the time of startup will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the abnormality notification setting process at the time of start-up, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the notification standby flag is stored in the sub-side RAM 982, thereby determining whether or not the notification is on standby. If the notification is not waiting, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not the response waiting flag is stored in the secondary RAM 982, thereby determining whether or not the response is waiting. If not waiting for a response, a request command is transmitted to the monitoring side MPU 811 in step S1203, and the startup flag is deleted from the secondary side RAM 982 in step S1204.

  After executing the process of step S1204, or when waiting for a response and making an affirmative determination in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether or not there is a response from the monitoring MPU 811 to the transmission of the request command. Specifically, based on the information input from the monitoring-side MPU 811 on the input side of the input / output port, it is determined whether either a notification-provided command or a notification-not-command is received.

  If there is no response from the monitoring MPU 811, a response waiting flag is stored in the secondary RAM 982 in step S 1206, and in step S 1207, a response limit time (specifically, from the timing at which the request command is transmitted in step S 1203). 1 sec) is determined. Whether or not the response limit time has elapsed is determined using the measurement counter area 987 of the secondary RAM 982, and the measurement counter area 987 is subjected to normal processing in a situation where a response waiting flag is stored. Every time it is newly activated, it is updated by one.

  If the response limit time has not elapsed, the setting process is terminated. If the response limit time has passed, the response waiting flag is deleted from the secondary RAM 982 in step S1208, and the communication abnormality notification flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 988 of the secondary RAM 982 in step S1209. A communication abnormality notification flag (communication abnormality notification information) is stored in (communication abnormality notification information storage means). The communication abnormality notification flag specifies whether or not the sub MPU 805 cannot normally communicate with the monitoring MPU 811.

  If there is a response from the monitoring side MPU 811, the response waiting flag is deleted from the secondary side RAM 982 in step S 1210. In a succeeding step S1211, it is determined whether or not the response command received from the monitoring side MPU 811 is a notification command. If the command is not a command with notification but a command without notification, this means that no abnormality has been identified by the monitoring side MPU 811 during the monitoring period for notification, and thus this setting processing is terminated.

  If it is a notification-provided command, an abnormality content identification process is executed in step S1212. In the abnormality content identification process, what information is to be started this time is identified from the information on the abnormality content included in the notification presence command. The abnormality content is one of the monitoring target events already described, and the information specified here is stored (stored or updated) in the monitoring side notification information storage area 986 of the secondary RAM 982. . In step S1212, the monitoring-side abnormality notification flag (monitoring-side abnormality notification information) is stored in the monitoring-side abnormality notification flag storage area (monitoring-side abnormality notification information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 988 of the sub-side RAM 982. The monitoring side abnormality notification flag specifies whether or not the monitoring side abnormality notification should be executed in the sub MPU 805.

  In a succeeding step S1213, it is determined whether or not the main-side abnormality notification is being performed by determining whether or not the main-side abnormality notification flag is stored in the sub-side RAM 982. If the main side abnormality notification is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1214. If the notification standby flag is stored in the sub side RAM 982, it is deleted. In subsequent step S1215, processing for starting monitoring-side abnormality notification is executed. At the start, the notification content is specified based on the information stored in the monitoring-side notification information storage area 986 of the secondary RAM 982, and the notification of the specified content is the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal. These devices are controlled so as to be executed by the display device 410. Even if a notification or effect other than the main-side abnormality notification is already executed, it is interrupted and the monitoring-side abnormality notification is started.

  If the main-side abnormality notification is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1216 without starting the monitoring-side abnormality notification. In step S1216, when the notification standby flag is not stored in the secondary RAM 982, the notification standby flag is stored. Thereafter, the setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the notification standby flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1213. And after performing the process of step S1213-step S1216 mentioned above, this setting process is complete | finished.

  Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 54), after executing the abnormality notification setting process at the time of startup in step S1005, or when a negative determination is made in both step S1003 and step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1006. move on. In step S1006, it is determined whether the main side abnormality notification is being performed or the monitoring side abnormality notification is being performed. If the main-side abnormality notification is being performed or the monitoring-side abnormality notification is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1010 without executing the process of step S1007.

  If neither the main-side abnormality notification nor the monitoring-side abnormality notification is being performed, a communication abnormality notification setting process is executed in step S1007. In the communication abnormality notification setting process, it is determined whether or not the communication abnormality notification flag is stored in the sub-side RAM 982, and if the communication abnormality notification flag is stored, a process for starting the communication abnormality notification is executed. To do. In this case, these devices are controlled so that the notification corresponding to the communication abnormality is executed by the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410. In addition, even if notifications and effects other than the main-side abnormality notification and the monitoring-side abnormality notification are already executed, it is interrupted and communication abnormality notification is started.

  After executing the process of step S1007, in step S1008, it is determined whether the main side abnormality notification is being performed, the monitoring side abnormality notification is being performed, or the communication abnormality notification is being performed. When the main-side abnormality notification is being performed, the monitoring-side abnormality notification is being performed, or the communication abnormality notification is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1010 without executing step processing.

  If neither the main-side abnormality notification, the monitoring-side abnormality notification, or the communication abnormality notification is in progress, an erasure notification setting process is executed in step S1009. In the erasure notification setting process, it is determined whether or not an erasure notification start command is received from the monitoring side MPU 811. If the erasure notification start command is received, the erasure notification in the various flag storage areas 988 of the secondary RAM 982 is determined. An erasure notification flag (erase notification information) is stored in the flag storage area (erase notification information storage means). When the erasure notification flag is stored, an erasure notification prompting the user to set the date and time of the RTC 993 is started. Execute the process. In this case, these devices are controlled so that the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410 are notified of the content that prompts the user to set the date and time of the RTC 993. Even if the effect is already being executed, it is interrupted and erasure notification is started.

  After executing the process of step S1009, after executing the notification canceling process in step S1010, the normal process is terminated.

<Process for Canceling Notification of Sub MPU 805>
Here, the notification cancellation processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the notification release process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a main-side notification release command is received from the main-side MPU 621. If the command has been received, processing for canceling the main side abnormality notification is executed in step S1302. Specifically, the main-side abnormality notification flag stored in the sub-side RAM 982 is erased and the main-side abnormality notification being executed is terminated. In a subsequent step S1303, a notification restriction end command indicating that the main-side abnormality notification is released is transmitted to the monitoring side MPU 811. Thereafter, the cancellation processing is terminated.

  If the main-side notification release command has not been received and a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1304 whether a monitoring-side notification release command has been received from the monitoring-side MPU 811. If the command has been received, processing for canceling the monitoring side abnormality notification is executed in step S1305. Specifically, the monitoring-side abnormality notification flag stored in the sub-side RAM 982 is deleted, and the monitoring-side abnormality notification being executed is terminated. Thereafter, the cancellation processing is terminated.

  If the monitoring side notification release command has not been received and a negative determination is made in step S1304, it is determined in step S1306 whether a communication abnormality release command has been received from the main MPU 621. The communication error cancel command is transmitted from the main MPU 621 to the sub MPU 805 based on a communication error cancel operation, specifically, a manual operation of the reset switch 625. If the command has been received, processing for canceling communication abnormality notification is executed in step S1307. Specifically, the communication abnormality notification flag stored in the secondary RAM 982 is deleted, and if a communication abnormality notification is being executed, it is terminated. Thereafter, the cancellation processing is terminated.

  If a communication abnormality cancel command has not been received and a negative determination is made in step S1306, other cancel processing is executed in step S1308. In the other cancellation processing, it is determined whether or not an erasure notification end command is received from the monitoring side MPU 811. If the erasure notification end command is received, the erasure notification flag stored in the secondary RAM 982 is deleted. In addition, if the erasure notification is being executed, it is terminated. Thereafter, the cancellation processing is terminated.

<Notification for Abnormality Identified by Monitoring Side MPU 811>
Next, a description will be given of an example of a notification state for an abnormality specified by the monitoring side MPU 811 in the notification monitoring period with reference to a time chart of FIG.

  First, the period of FIG. 58A in which the operation for canceling the monitoring-side abnormality notification is performed before the re-notification period (for example, 3 hours) elapses without the abnormality being specified by the main-side MPU 621 will be described.

  In the notification monitoring period (for example, at night when the power to the slot machine 10 is turned off), a notification condition establishment flag is stored in the monitoring side RAM 992 when an event to be monitored occurs at the timing t1. Thereafter, it is assumed that the re-notification period for the occurrence of the monitored event has elapsed at the timing t2, and the notification monitoring period has ended at the timing t3.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the power supply is turned on and supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is started. In this case, since the notification condition establishment flag is stored in the monitoring side RAM 992, first, abnormality notification is started on the display screen 410a of the liquid crystal display device 410 as monitoring side abnormality notification by the sub MPU 805.

  Thereafter, at the timing t5, the setting switch 809 is manually operated as a monitoring-side abnormality notification release operation, whereby the monitoring-side abnormality notification by the sub-MPU 805 is terminated and the re-notification period has already elapsed. Therefore, the notification condition establishment flag is erased from the monitoring side RAM 992.

  Next, a description will be given of the period in FIG. 58B in which an abnormality is specified by the main MPU 621 and the monitoring-side abnormality notification canceling operation is not performed before the re-notification period elapses.

  In the notification monitoring period, when an event to be monitored occurs at a timing t6, a notification condition establishment flag is stored in the monitoring RAM 992, and then a re-notification period for the occurrence of the event to be monitored at a timing t7. And the notification monitoring period ends at the timing t8.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, the power supply is turned on and supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is started. Unlike the case of FIG. 58 (a) above, the occurrence of an abnormality is specified in the main MPU 621 immediately after the power is turned on. Accordingly, the sub-side MPU 805 gives priority to the main-side abnormality notification and waits for the monitoring-side abnormality notification to be executed (suspended).

  After that, the reset switch 625 is manually operated as a monitoring-side abnormality notification release operation at a timing t10 in which the main-side abnormality notification is being executed. As already described, even when the monitoring-side abnormality notification is canceled in the situation where the main-side abnormality notification is executed and the monitoring-side abnormality notification is on standby, it is invalidated. Therefore, at the timing of t10, the notification condition establishment flag is not erased, and the abnormality notification by the sub MPU 805 is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the main-side abnormality notification is ended, and the sub-side MPU 805 starts the monitoring-side abnormality notification. After that, when the monitoring side abnormality notification is canceled at the timing t12, the monitoring side abnormality notification by the sub MPU 805 is finished and the re-notification period has already passed, so the monitoring side RAM 992 notifies the monitoring side abnormality notification. The condition satisfaction flag is deleted.

  Next, the period of FIG. 58 (c) in which the operation for canceling the monitoring side abnormality notification is performed before the re-notification period elapses after the abnormality is identified by the main side MPU 621 will be described.

  In the monitoring period for notification, when a monitored event occurs at the timing of t13, a notification condition establishment flag is stored in the monitoring side RAM 992. Thereafter, the power supply is turned on at timing t14, and supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is started. In this case, since the notification condition establishment flag is stored in the monitoring side RAM 992, the monitoring side abnormality notification by the sub MPU 805 is started.

  Incidentally, since the timing is a notification monitoring period and the fact that the power is turned ON is set as an event to be monitored, the history of the event is stored in the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 of the monitoring side RAM 992. Is done. In order to prevent re-notification of an event occurring during the notification monitoring period, it is necessary to perform a release operation after the re-notification period elapses from the latest event (the power is turned on).

  Thereafter, the monitoring-side abnormality notification by the sub-MPU 805 is ended by performing an operation of canceling the monitoring-side abnormality notification at a timing t15. However, since the re-notification period has not yet elapsed at the timing, the notification condition establishment flag is not erased from the monitoring side RAM 992. In this way, when the release operation is performed in a situation where the re-notification period has not elapsed, the fraudster who generated the monitored event confirms the abnormality notification for the event with the administrator of the game hall In order to prevent this from happening, there may be a case where a release operation is to be performed in advance.

  Thereafter, it is assumed that the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off by an unauthorized person at the timing of t16. Further, it is assumed that the re-notification period for the occurrence of the monitored event elapses at the timing of t17 and the notification monitoring period ends at the timing of t18.

  After that, at the timing of t19, the power source is normally started up by the administrator of the game hall, and supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 itself is started. In this case, since the notification condition establishment flag is stored in the monitoring side RAM 992, the monitoring side abnormality notification by the sub MPU 805 is started. Since the abnormality notification is made at least for the monitored event that occurred at the timing t13, the current notification corresponds to re-notification for the monitored event that occurred at the timing t13.

  Thereafter, when the monitoring side abnormality notification is canceled at the timing of t20, the monitoring side abnormality notification by the sub MPU 805 is ended and the notification condition establishment flag is deleted from the monitoring side RAM 992.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The main controller 610 is attached to the inner housing 310 via the pedestal unit 710. The main control device 610 is rotatably held by a holding member 740, and is configured such that the solder surface 620b side of the main control board 620 can be visually confirmed by rotating about 90 degrees. For this reason, when confirming whether or not fraudulent acts on the main control board 620 are performed, the work can be performed while the main control device 610 is mounted on the pedestal unit 710, and the confirmation work is prevented from being complicated. It has been.

  The main controller 610 is removed from the base unit 710 (specifically, the holding member 740) by a main controller monitoring switch 790. As a result, even if an illegal act (for example, replacement of the MPU 621 or replacement of the main control board 620 with an illegal board) is performed on the main control device 610, the fact can be grasped at an early stage. ing. Thereby, expansion of damage can be controlled.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, the main control device 610 and the holding member 740 move based on the relative movement of the main control device monitoring switch 790, and the main pin control 791 changes its position. The movement detection of the device 610 is performed. Guide grooves 761, 762 are provided in the holding member 740 constituting the pedestal unit 710, and the guide grooves 761, 762 are configured to suppress variations in the attachment / detachment orbit of the main controller 610, so that the movement by the main controller monitoring switch 790 is performed. The certainty of detection is improved.

  A main controller monitoring switch 790 is disposed on the back side of the guide groove 761. As a result, the step 705 of the main control device 610 and the projecting pin 791 of the main control device monitoring switch 790 can be brought into contact with each other in a state where the above-described position variation is suitably suppressed. Further improvement of the certainty of movement detection by 790 is realized.

  The guide groove 762 of the holding member 740 is closed by the protrusion 703 of the main controller 610. In particular, when the movement of the main controller 610 is detected by the main controller monitoring switch 790, a closed space CS that surrounds the in / out pin 791 is formed. As a result, it is possible to avoid an unauthorized operation on the in / out pin 791 and to improve the crime prevention.

The combination direction of both the structural bodies 631 and 632 constituting the substrate box 630 and the attaching / detaching direction of the main controller 610 with respect to the holding member 740 are crossed (specifically, orthogonal). This makes it difficult to perform an illegal act such as separating the main control device 610 attached to the holding member 740 into the constituent members 631 and 632 without removing the main control device 610 from the holding member 740.
For example, a fraudulent act in which only the front-side structure 631 to which the main control board 620 is fixed is removed from the holding member 740 and the back-side structure 632 is left on the holding member 740 side, thereby avoiding monitoring of the main controller monitoring switch 790. Can be suitably suppressed.

  The projecting pin 791 of the main controller monitoring switch 790 is displaced based on the relative movement between the main controller 610 and the holding member 740. That is, the main controller monitoring switch 790 is a contact type. Thereby, the movement detection at the time of electric power supply interruption | blocking can be performed suitably. For example, when a non-contact type sensor (photo sensor or the like) is used, it is assumed that monitoring power (for example, operation power or standby power) is increased. Main controller monitoring switch 790 is used not only when power is supplied, but also when power supply is shut off. For this reason, it is not preferable that the power for operation increases because the capacity of the power supply unit during power interruption increases. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the main controller monitoring switch 790 is a contact type as described above, thereby avoiding an increase in monitoring power and contributing to power saving of the slot machine 10. .

  The main controller monitoring switch 790 is arranged on the base unit 710 (specifically, holding member 740) side. Thereby, the workability | operativity at the time of the main control apparatus 610 attachment / detachment work is ensured. Of course, the main controller monitoring switch 790 can be arranged on the main controller 610 side. However, when such a configuration change is performed, when the main controller 610 is attached / detached, it is necessary to attach / detach the harness that connects the main controller monitoring switch 790 and the sub controller 800 together. . Thus, it is not preferable from the viewpoint of ensuring workability that the work accompanying the attaching / detaching work of the main controller 610 is added. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, by disposing the main controller monitoring switch 790 on the holding member 740 side, complication of the attaching / detaching work of the main controller 610 is suppressed, and a practically preferable configuration is realized. ing.

  Further, by arranging the main control device monitoring switch 790 on the holding member 740 side, the total length of the harness connected to the main control device monitoring switch 790 can be shortened. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the harness to be fraudulent. Furthermore, since it is possible to narrow a portion that is likely to be fraudulent, even if fraud is performed, the fraud can be easily found.

  In particular, since the main controller monitoring switch 790 is mounted not on the base member 720 but on the holding member 740, even when the main controller 610 is rotated together with the holding member 740, The relative position with respect to the control device 610 is maintained in a fixed relationship. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the main control device monitoring switch 790 to malfunction.

  The main control device monitoring switch 790 is fixed to the holding member 740, and the main control device 610 or the pedestal unit 710 needs to be removed in order to access the main control device monitoring switch 790. Specifically, the holding member 740 is formed with an opening 794 for attaching and detaching the main controller monitoring switch 790, and this opening 794 is a left side bent portion 726 of the base member 720 and the front side configuration of the sub controller 800. The body 822 is covered. Therefore, in order to access the main controller monitoring switch 790, for example, by removing the main controller 610, an access path from the guide groove 761 side is secured, or the pedestal unit 710 is removed from the inner housing 310. It is necessary to secure an access route from the opening 794 side. In the former case, such an action can be grasped by the main controller monitoring switch 790, so that an illegal action can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the latter case, the base unit 710 needs to be removed by removing the fixture 721 from the back side of the inner housing 310. To perform such work, it is necessary to remove the surface changing unit 300 from the housing 11. is there. The surface changing unit 300 is provided with trace means (specifically, a regulating member 500) for leaving the trace based on the removal from the housing 11. For this reason, it is difficult to illegally remove the base unit 710 and access the main controller monitoring switch 790 without leaving a trace.

  Of the fixtures 721 that fix the pedestal unit 710 to the inner housing 310, the holding member 740 is positioned on the front side of the fixture 721 mounted on the flat plate portion 722 of the pedestal member 720. Thus, unauthorized access to the fixture 721 is suppressed. Thereby, it is more difficult to remove the pedestal unit 710 from the inside of the surface changing unit 300.

  When the main control device monitoring switch 790 detects the movement of the main control device 610, the main control device 610 is moved using the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410. The fact is announced. Thereby, it can be shown to the hall manager or the like that there is a possibility that the main controller 610 has been cheated. Therefore, it can contribute to early detection of fraud.

  Further, when the main control device monitoring switch 790 detects the movement of the main control device 610, the detection information is transmitted to the hall management device or the like via the external concentration terminal board 900. Thereby, it can be shown that there is a possibility that fraud has been performed to the hall manager or the like. Therefore, it can contribute to early detection of fraud.

  Further, the power supply unit 813 for power interruption is arranged on the monitoring control board 803 of the sub-control device 800 so that the movement of the main control device 610 can be detected even in the state where the power supply is cut off. Thereby, the improvement of crime prevention is aimed at.

  The main controller monitoring switch 790 is biased and arranged on the rotation base end side of the front door 12 in the arrangement region of the main controller 610. For this reason, it becomes difficult to access the main controller monitoring switch 790 with the front door 12 slightly opened. When access to the main controller monitoring switch 790 is made by opening the front door 12 wide, such an action is easily noticeable by the opened front door 12. Thereby, the deterrent effect of fraud can be heightened.

  The main control device monitoring switch 790 and the corresponding sub control device 800 are arranged on the rotation base end side of the front door 12. Thus, by arranging the main control device monitoring switch 790 and the sub control device 800 on the same side, the total length of the harness connecting them can be shortened. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the harness to be fraudulent.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following different embodiment may be applied individually to the configuration in the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination with each other.

  (1) In the above embodiment, the main controller 610 is rotatably supported by the holding member 740. However, this is changed, and the main controller 610 is slidably held by the holding member. It is good also as a structure. Moreover, the holding member 740 should just have the function to hold | maintain at least main controller 610 so that attachment or detachment is possible, and the function to hold | maintain in the movable state as mentioned above is not necessarily required.

  In addition, the main controller 610 is mounted on the inner casing 310 via the pedestal unit 710, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pedestal unit 710 may be omitted, and the main controller 610 may be directly attached to the back plate portion 310c of the inner housing 310. When such changes are made, the following changes may be made together. In other words, the main control device monitoring switch may be disposed between the main control device and the back plate portion 310 c of the inner housing 310.

  However, in the configuration in which the main control device 610 is directly attached to the inner housing as described above, both plate surface sides of the main control board 620 are visually checked without removing the main control device 610 when performing maintenance or the like. It can be difficult to confirm. Therefore, it is preferable that the main control device 610 is mounted via a holding member or the like so that both plate surface sides of the main control board 620 can be visually recognized without removing the main control device 610.

  In the above embodiment, the main controller 610 is mounted on the surface changing unit 300 as the replacement unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mounting target may be the casing 11. Is possible. In particular, in a slot machine of a type that does not have an exchange unit, the mounting target of the main control device 610 may be, for example, the back plate 11c of the housing 11.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the main controller 610 is detachably attached to the holding member 740, but is not limited thereto. The holding member 740 only needs to have a function of holding at least the main control device 610, and does not need to have a function of defining the attaching / detaching direction of the main control device 610. For example, the guide grooves 761 and 762 in the holding member 740 can be omitted.

  Further, the main controller 610 may be attached to and detached from the holding member 740 by rotating. For example, a support shaft that rotatably supports the main control device 610 on the holding member 740 and a hook portion that is hooked on the main control device 610 when the main control device 610 rotates about the rotation center axis of the support shaft. And should be provided. In the case of adopting such a configuration, the main control device monitoring switch may be disposed on the rotating front end side of the main control device 610. By adopting a configuration in which the main control device monitoring switch is arranged on the rotating front end side, the main control device monitoring switch for the removal of the main control device 610 is compared with the case where it is arranged on the rotating base end side of the main control device. This reaction can be made suitable.

  (3) In the above embodiment, the two structural members 631 and 632 of the main controller 610 are in contact with the protruding and retracting pin 791 of the main controller monitoring switch 790. In other words, the movement of the main controller 610 is detected based on the movement of both the constituent bodies 631 and 632. It is also possible to change this as follows. For example, the movement detection target by the main controller monitoring switch 790 is not the entire main controller 610 (specifically, the board box 630), but may be either the front-side structure 631 or the back-side structure 632 constituting the board box 630. Good. When such a configuration change is performed, it is preferable that the front-side structure 631 as a fixing target of the main control board 620 is brought into contact with the retracting pin 791. As a result, even if the components 631 and 632 are separated while the substrate box 630 is held by the holding member 740, the main control substrate 620 is moved by the movement of the front-side component plate 631. Therefore, the main control board 620 can be monitored by the main controller monitoring switch 790.

  (4) In the above embodiment, in the state in which the main controller 610 is mounted on the holding member 740, the combination direction of the front side structural body 631 and the back side structural body 632 constituting the board box 630 and the board box 630 with respect to the holding member 740. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the combination direction of both the structural bodies 631 and 632 and the mounting / removal direction of the substrate box 630 with respect to the holding member 740 the same direction. However, when such a change is made, the main control device 610 is released from the holding member 740 and the coupling of the components 631 and 632 is released, and the main control board 620 of both the components 631 and 632 is released. There is a possibility that an illegal act of removing one of the two fixed to the main control board 620 is performed. If the other of the components 631 and 632 is left on the holding member 740 at the time of the removal, movement detection by the main controller monitoring switch 790 can be avoided, which is not preferable. Therefore, it is desirable that the combination direction of the two structural bodies 631 and 632 and the direction in which the substrate box 630 is attached to and detached from the holding member 740 are crossed.

  (5) In the above embodiment, the main controller monitoring switch 790 is disposed in the inner part of the guide groove 761, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, between the main controller 610 and the holding member 740, for example, the main control It is also possible to arrange between the back side counter plate portion 675 of the device 610 and the counter plate portion 741 of the holding member 740. Even when such a change is made, it is preferable to form a closed space that isolates the operating space of the retracting pin 791 from the surroundings when the main controller monitoring switch 790 is operating.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation space of the retracting pin 791 is isolated from the surroundings by the configuration that defines the mounting direction of the main control device 610. That is, a configuration in which the protrusion 703 of the main control device 610 and the guide groove 761 of the holding member 740 have a function of defining the mounting direction of the main control device 610 and a function of isolating the operating space of the retracting pin 791. However, it is not limited to this. The operating space of the retracting pin 791 may be isolated by a separate and independent configuration with respect to the guide groove 761 and the protrusion 703. Specific examples thereof will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b). 59 (a) and 59 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration relating to the main controller monitoring switch. When the main controller is mounted, the relative positions of the main controller and the holding member are shown in FIG. 59 (a). → Changes in the order of FIG.

  In one side portion of the holding member 1050, a guide groove 1051 into which the protruding portion 1071 of the main controller 1070 is fitted is formed in the same manner as the holding member 740 in the above embodiment. By moving the main control device 1070 in a state where the protrusion 1071 is fitted in the guide groove 1051, the mounting direction of the main control device 1070 is defined.

  The bulging portion 1052 of the holding member 1050 is provided with a switch accommodating portion 1053 that accommodates the main controller monitoring switch 790. The switch housing portion 1053 is formed separately and independently from the guide groove 1051 described above, and has a cylindrical shape opened to the front side in the mounting direction of the main controller 610. The main controller monitoring switch 790 is fixed by a fixing tool such as a screw while being accommodated in the switch accommodating portion 1053.

  The main controller monitoring switch 790 is arranged such that the retracting pin 791 faces the main controller 1070 side. The main controller monitoring switch 790 is configured such that the retracting pin 791 does not protrude from the opening 1054 of the switch accommodating portion 1053, that is, the operating space of the retracting pin 791 is accommodated in the switch accommodating portion 1053.

  The main control device 1070 is provided with a protrusion 1072 that fits into the switch housing portion 1053. The protrusion 1072 is formed so as to close the inner space of the switch housing portion 1053 when the outer circumferential surface 1072a abuts against the inner circumferential surface 1053a of the switch housing portion 1053, and a protruding pin is provided at the tip portion thereof. A contact portion 1073 that contacts 791 is provided.

  The protrusion 1072 is configured to be fitted to the switch housing portion 1953 in a state where the mounting direction of the main control device 610 is defined by the protrusion 1071 of the main control device 610 and the guide groove 1051 of the holding member 1050. It has become. As a result, even if the gap generated between the switch housing portion 1053 and the projection 1072 is reduced, the switch housing portion 1053 and the projection 1072 can be gripped, thereby preventing the inconvenience that the mounting of the main controller 1070 is hindered. doing.

  (6) In the above embodiment, the guide groove 761 and the protruding portion 703 are fixed by the fixing tool 771. Specifically, the fixture 771 is arranged on the moving path of the stepped portion 705 as a contact target of the main control device monitoring switch 790 with respect to the retracting pin 791, but the arrangement location of the fixture 771 is arbitrary. However, preferably, when a configuration in which the main control device monitoring switch 790 is arranged in the vicinity of the main control device monitoring switch 790, for example, on one side of the holding member 740, is the same as the arrangement side. A fixture 771 may be disposed on the side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the main control device monitoring switch 790 to detect the movement of the main control device 610 based on the positional deviation or the like of the main control device 610.

  (7) In the above embodiment, as a configuration for grasping the removal of the main controller 610 from the holding member 740, in addition to the main controller monitoring switch 790 described above, the seal seal S2 and the caulking structure (specifically, the box side coupling portion) 667 and pedestal side coupling portion 772), but one or both of the seal seal S2 and the caulking structure can be omitted.

  (8) In the above embodiment, when the retracting pin 791 of the main controller monitoring switch 790 operates (displaces) with the relative movement of the main controller 610 and the holding member 740, the retracting pin 791 is closed space CS. It was set as the structure which operates (displaces) in. That is, the main controller 610 and the holding member 740 are configured to isolate the operation space of the retracting pin 791 from the outside. It is also possible to change this as follows. That is, the operation space of the in / out pin 791 is not necessarily a closed space, and may be a space that is surrounded by a wall portion or the like and suppresses the exposure of the in / out pin 791.

  A specific example will be briefly described below with reference to FIGS. 59 (c) and 59 (d). FIGS. 59C and 59D are schematic views showing the relationship between the main controller 1100 and the holding member 1120. When the main controller 1100 is mounted on the holding member 1120, the main controller 1100 is shown. And the holding member 1120 change in the order of FIG. 59 (c) → FIG. 59 (d).

  A switch accommodating portion 1122 that accommodates the main controller monitoring switch 790 is formed on the side wall portion 1121 of the holding member 1120. The main controller monitoring switch 790 is fixed in a state in which the protruding and retracting pin 791 faces the main controller 1100 as in the above embodiment.

  The main controller 1100 is formed with an abutting portion 1101 that abuts on the retracting pin 791 and an opposing wall portion 1102 that faces the outer surface 1121 a of the side wall portion 1121 of the holding member 1120. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing wall portion 1102 and the side wall portion 1121, so that when the main controller 1100 is mounted, the side wall portion 1121 and the opposing wall portion 1102 are not easily inconvenienced. Yes.

  Further, the edge of the facing wall 1102 on the holding member 1120 side protrudes more to the holding member 1120 side than the abutting portion 1101, and the edge of the side wall 1121 on the main control device 1100 side is the tip portion of the retracting pin 791. Rather than the main controller 1100 side. When the main controller 1100 is attached to the holding member 1120, the side wall portion 1121 and the opposing wall portion 1102 are overlapped with each other, and then come into contact with the contact portion 1101 and the retracting pin 791. In other words, when the main controller 1100 is removed, the in / out pin 791 operates in a state where the overlap between the opposing wall portion 1102 and the side wall portion 1121 is maintained. ) Can be suppressed, and unauthorized access to the in / out pin 791 can be suppressed.

  (9) In the above embodiment, the surface changing unit 300 is removed from the housing 11 to enable the base unit 710 to be removed from the surface changing unit 300. The base unit 710 may be removable while the 300 is attached to the housing 11. Specifically, the pedestal unit 710 (specifically, the pedestal member 720) is fixed by a fixing tool screwed from the outside of the surface changing unit 300. However, the fixing tool screwed from the inside of the surface changing unit 300 is used. Therefore, the pedestal unit 710 (specifically, the pedestal member 720) may be fixed. However, when such a configuration change is made, it is assumed that inconveniences such as the main controller 610 being removed together with the base unit 710 are likely to occur. Therefore, when making the above-described changes, it is preferable to make the following changes together. The details of the change will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the main controller 1150 and the holding member 1170.

  In the above embodiment, the holding member 740 is provided with the protrusion 754 that restricts the rotation of the holding member 740 and the main control device 610 by contacting the stopper portion 824a of the sub control device 800. A protrusion 1151 for restricting the rotation of the holding member 1170 and the main controller 1150 by contacting the stopper 824a of the controller 800 is provided on the main controller 1150 side. Accordingly, the rotation amount of the holding member 1170 is configured to be larger when the main controller 1150 is removed than when the main controller 1150 is attached. If the holding member 1170 rotates and interferes with the board box 842 of the relay board 841, the shape and arrangement of the relay board 841 and the board box 842 are changed (for example, offset downward) and held. It is preferable that the member 1170 be allowed to rotate.

  The amount of rotation of the holding member 1170 may be set so as to allow removal of the fixture 1180 that fixes the base member 720 to the back plate portion 310c of the inner housing 310. Specifically, the fixing member 1180 for fixing the base member 720 is mounted from the inside of the surface changing unit 300, and the holding member 1170 is disposed on the removal track of the fixing member 1180. Further, even when the holding member 1170 is rotated and the rotation is restricted by the projection 1151 of the main control device 1150, the holding member 1170 (specifically, the bulging portion in detail) 1171), the mounting position of the fixture 1180 is determined (see FIG. 60 (a)).

  When the main controller 1150 is removed and moved to the maximum rotation position, the holding member 1170 (specifically, the bulging portion 1171) is separated from the removal track of the fixture 1180, and the insertion space for the tool T is removed. WS is ensured.

  With the configuration described above in detail, when the main controller 1150 is mounted, the removal of the fixture 1180 (that is, the removal of the pedestal unit 1190) is restricted, and when the main controller 1150 is removed, the surface changing unit. The removal of the fixture 1180 (that is, the removal of the pedestal unit 1190) is allowed without removing the 300 from the housing 11.

  (10) In the above embodiment, the main controller monitoring switch 790 is mounted on the holding member 740. However, the main controller monitoring switch 790 may be mounted on the main controller 610 by changing this. However, when such a change is made, it may be necessary to perform attachment / detachment work such as a harness connecting the main control device monitoring switch 790 and the sub control device 800 every time the main control device 610 is attached / detached. Due to this, there is a concern that the attaching / detaching work of the main controller 610 becomes complicated. Therefore, the main control device monitoring switch 790 is preferably arranged on the holding member 740 side (that is, the side on which the sub control device 800 is mounted) as shown in the above embodiment.

  (11) In the above embodiment, an opening 794 is provided in the side wall 751 of the holding member 740 as an insertion site of the main controller monitoring switch 790, and the opening 794 is formed on the left bent portion 726 of the base member 720 and The front side structure 822 of the control device 800 is covered. It is good also as a structure which changes this and covers the opening part 794 with either one of those base members 720 and the sub control apparatus 800. FIG.

  For example, a cover that extends from the left bent portion 726 to the left bent portion 726 of the base member 720 along the movement path of the opening 794 accompanying the rotation of the holding member 740 and covers the opening of the holding member 740 The part may be integrally formed.

  Alternatively, the opening 794 may be blocked by the main controller 610 disposed at the mounting completion position.

  Note that the opening 794 can be omitted. However, when such a change is made, it is assumed that the attaching / detaching workability of the main controller monitoring switch 790 and the moldability of the switch housing portion 780 are likely to be deteriorated. Therefore, it is preferable that the opening 794 be included and the opening 794 be closed by another member.

  (12) In the above embodiment, the main control device monitoring switch 790 detects the movement of the main control device 610 by moving the retracting pin 791 to the maximum projecting position, and the retracting pin 791 moves from the maximum projecting position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The movement of the main control device 610 is detected by moving the in / out pin 791 from the minimum protruding position (the position pressed by the main control device 610), and the main control device 610 is moved by moving the in / out pin 791 to the minimum protruding position. It is good also as a structure which detects mounting | wearing.

  However, in these configurations, there is a possibility that the main controller monitoring switch 790 reacts too severely to a position shift (for example, rattling) of the main controller 610. Therefore, it is preferable to avoid the excessively sensitive movement detection of the main controller 610 by the main controller monitoring switch 790 by making the following changes. That is, a boundary between a section in which the movement of the main controller 610 is detected and a section in which the attachment of the main controller 610 is detected may be set between the maximum protruding position and the minimum protruding position of the retracting pin 791. That is, it is preferable to set a movement detection range of the main control device 610 that includes the maximum protruding position in the entire movement range of the retracting pin 791 and an attachment detection range of the main control device 610 that includes the minimum protruding position. Thereby, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  (13) In the above embodiment, the main controller monitoring switch 790 is used as the “detecting means” for detecting the movement of the main controller 610. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, another contact sensor such as a push sensor may be used. It is also possible to use a non-contact sensor (so-called proximity sensor) such as a photo sensor.

  However, when a non-contact sensor is used, the operating power tends to be larger than that of the contact sensor. In order to realize the operation at the time of power interruption in a non-contact sensor, it is necessary to increase the amount of power that can be used at the time of power interruption. Therefore, it is desirable to use a contact type sensor as shown in the above embodiment as the main controller monitoring switch. Instead of the main controller monitoring switch 790, a configuration similar to that of the main controller monitoring switch 790 can be used.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the movement of the main controller 610 (specifically, the main control board 620) is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration similar to that of the main control device monitoring switch 790 may be applied to the sub control device 800 (specifically, the sub control board 802 and the monitoring control board 803) to detect the movement of the sub control device 800.

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration that detects the movement of the main control board 620 from the board box 630 (specifically, the front side structure 631) that constitutes the main control apparatus 610. In the above embodiment, the main control board 620 is fixed to the front side structure 631. Therefore, it is preferable that the movement of the main control board 620 from the front structure 631 is detected.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a configuration that detects the movement of various boards such as the fork side relay board 855 and the main side relay board 856.

  (15) In the above embodiment, the monitoring side MPU 811 monitors a predetermined event both when the operating power is supplied to the slot machine 10 itself and when the operating power is not supplied to the slot machine 10 itself. However, instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which monitoring of a predetermined event is performed only when operating power is not supplied to the slot machine 10 itself. Even in this case, the configuration of notification through the liquid crystal display device 410 or the like in the above embodiments, the configuration regarding re-notification, the configuration of the correlation between the main side abnormality notification and the monitoring side abnormality notification, the monitoring side MPU 811 and the sub side It is preferable to apply a configuration in which the MPU 805 is accommodated in the same substrate box 804 and a configuration related to a signal path.

  (16) The types of events to be monitored are not limited to the events in the above-described embodiment, and may include at least the main control device 610 as the events to be monitored.

  For example, as in the above embodiment, when the monitoring side MPU 811 determines that an event to be monitored has occurred during the monitoring period for notification, the operating power is supplied to the slot machine 10 itself. In a configuration in which notification is performed in a situation where it is necessary to perform an end operation while the power is turned on in order to end the notification, a power OFF operation may be set as an event to be monitored. In this case, even after the fraudulent person has cheated on the slot machine 10 and turned on the power to the slot machine 10 and ended the notification of the fraud, the power of the slot machine 10 was turned off. At that time, the event becomes a notification target. This state continues indefinitely during the monitoring period for notification. According to this configuration, it is possible to cope with an operation of terminating notification by an unauthorized person without setting a re-notification period as in the above embodiments.

  Further, for example, whether or not the setting key insertion unit 626 has been turned ON may be an event to be monitored. In this case, whether or not the winning probability setting operation has been performed illegally even if the power ON operation is not to be monitored. It becomes possible to monitor whether or not. Further, whether or not the start detection sensor 961 has moved from the installation location may be an event to be monitored.

  (17) The priority order of a plurality of types of notifications executed based on the processing in the sub-side MPU 805 is not limited to that in the above-described embodiments. For example, for the abnormality identified in the main-side MPU 621 It is good also as a structure where the direction of the alerting | reporting with respect to the abnormality identified by the monitoring side MPU811 has priority over alerting | reporting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting with respect to the communication abnormality of the monitoring side MPU811 is given priority. In addition, for example, at least notification for the abnormality specified by the main MPU 621 and notification for the abnormality specified by the monitoring MPU 811 may be performed at the same time. When the start timings overlap, notifications may be made simultaneously. In such a configuration in which a plurality of types of notifications are simultaneously performed, it is preferable that the information on the types of notification targets being simultaneously performed is clearly indicated.

  (18) The notification means controlled by the monitoring side MPU 811 is not limited to the central lamp unit 26, the speaker units 82 and 83, and the liquid crystal display device 410, and is a dedicated speaker unit or a dedicated light emitting unit. Also good.

  (19) The condition for terminating the abnormality notification that is specified and executed by the monitoring side MPU 811 as being monitored during the notification monitoring period is not an operation of the setting switch 809 and is arbitrary. Yes, for example, an existing operation unit such as the start lever 45 may be operated. In a configuration having an identification information input unit such as a numeric keypad as the operation unit, a password input operation is performed on the identification information input unit. The setting key may be turned on for the setting key insertion portion 626 or a predetermined key may be turned on for another key insertion portion. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which replaces with an operation part, a receiving part is provided, and abnormality notification is complete | finished by receiving the completion | finish radio wave transmitted from the terminal device which the manager of a game hall has in the said receiving part. Further, the abnormality notification may be terminated when a predetermined notification continuation period (for example, 1 min) has elapsed without requiring an active operation.

  In addition, you may apply what is based on the input of a PIN number as mentioned above to the setting of the date and time of RTC993 and the setting of the monitoring period for notification. Moreover, when applying the configuration relating to the input of the password as described above, the configuration of a known password forgetting prevention unit or a known password number changing unit may be applied.

  (20) In the above embodiment, the main MPU 621 performs monitoring in a state in which operating power is supplied to the slot machine 10, but instead, it is executed by a dedicated control device. It is also possible to have a configuration that is executed by the sub MPU 805.

  (21) It is not essential that the monitoring side MPU 811 is equipped with the RTC 993, and the RTC 993 may be omitted. In this case, the re-notification period may be measured using a counter provided in the monitoring RAM 992, a counter circuit provided in the monitoring control board 803, or the like. Further, the date and time of occurrence may not be displayed when displaying the history of monitoring results on the display screen 410a of the liquid crystal display device 410.

  (22) In the above embodiment, the monitoring result notification in the monitoring side MPU 811 is executed only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. However, only when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off or even when the power is turned off. It may be configured to be executed.

  Further, although the notification monitoring period can be changed, the notification monitoring period may be fixed. In addition, a movement event from the installation location of the main control device 610 may be excluded from the notification target when it occurs outside the monitoring period for notification.

  (23) When the monitoring side MPU 811 identifies the occurrence of an event to be monitored in the monitoring period for notification, the game hall through the external concentration terminal board 900 at the timing when the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started. An abnormal signal may be transmitted to the management device. In this case, it is possible to specify or store the occurrence of the monitored event also in the game hall management device.

  (24) In the above embodiment, each unit area of the regular monitoring history storage area 1001 and each unit area of the notification monitoring history storage area 1002 are stored according to the order in which multiple types of events to be monitored occur. However, instead of this, an area corresponding to each event may be provided, and a plurality of unit areas may be individually set for these areas.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which the manager of a game hall can select the event made into the monitoring object among the multiple types of events set beforehand. In this case, only one type may be selected, or a plurality of selectable combinations may be selected in any combination.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the sub MPU 805 and the monitoring MPU 811 are accommodated in the same board box 804. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main MPU 621 and the monitoring MPU 811 May be accommodated in the same substrate box. In this case, the main MPU 621 may be configured to monitor whether or not the monitoring MPU 811 is operating normally. Further, in the configuration in which the functions of the main MPU 621 and the sub MPU 805 are integrated as the same MPU, the MPU and the monitoring MPU 811 may be accommodated in the same board box.

  (26) The main MPU 621 that performs monitoring of a predetermined event when operating power is supplied to the slot machine 10 itself, the sub MPU 805 and the liquid crystal display device 410 that notify the monitoring result, and the slot machine 10 The slot machine 10 includes a monitoring side MPU 811 that performs monitoring of a predetermined event or a different event when the operating power is not supplied to itself, and the liquid crystal display device 410 that notifies the monitoring result. The monitoring result when the operating power is not supplied to the slot machine 10 can be clearly notified, and the diversion and versatility of the configuration for performing the monitoring and notification when the operating power is not supplied to the slot machine 10 itself are enhanced. Focusing on the remarkable effect, the sub-side MPU 805 and the monitoring side MPU 811 have the same board box. Configuration gaming machine or not contained in, may be applied to gaming machine configuration re-notification is not performed.

  (27) In the above embodiment, a privilege for paying out medals is awarded when a small role winning is established. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a configuration in which a player is given some privilege. If it is. For example, a configuration in which prizes other than medals are paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credits owned by a player, an increase in credited medals corresponds to provision of a privilege.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, the so-called A type slot machine has been described. However, the B type, C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, RT game, The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a type equipped with a CT game, and in any case, it is obvious that the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Note that the bonus winning in each type includes BB winning, RB winning, SB winning, RT winning, CT winning and the like.

  (29) The symbols of the reels 555 to 557 are not limited to pictures, numbers, characters, and the like, but may be geometric lines or figures. In addition, the design can be configured by light, color, or the like, the design can be configured by a three-dimensional shape or the like, and the design can be configured by combining these. That is, it is sufficient that the symbol has a function as identification information (identification information).

  (30) In the above embodiment, the hopper monitoring switch 230 is exposed to the back plate 11c side of the housing 11 in a state where the hopper device 180 is mounted, but this is changed and the hopper device 180 is mounted. Accordingly, the hopper monitoring switch 230 may be isolated within a predetermined space. In other words, the access to the hopper monitoring switch 230 from the back plate 11c side of the housing 11 is allowed, but the access to the hopper monitoring switch 230 may be disabled by mounting the hopper device 180. .

  Hereinafter, specific examples will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. 61 (a) is a perspective view showing the hopper monitoring switch 230 and a configuration related thereto, FIG. 61 (b) is a perspective view of the hopper device arranged at the mounting completion position as seen from the rear, and FIG. 62 is the hopper device and the hopper. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the relationship of a monitoring switch. FIG. 61 (a) shows a state where the hopper device is removed for convenience, and FIG. 61 (b) shows a partially broken case 11 so that the inside of the case 11 can be seen. Shows the state.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, a switch cover 2050 that covers the hopper monitoring switch 230 is provided around the hopper monitoring switch 230. The switch cover 2050 has a casing shape opened to the front side in the mounting direction of the hopper device 2060 and the base portion 2081 side of the lower plate 2080, and the lower open portion thereof is blocked by the base portion 2081. ing. More specifically, the switch cover 2050 includes a left vertical wall portion 2061 facing the left side plate 11d of the housing 11, and a right vertical wall portion facing the left vertical wall portion 2061 with the hopper monitoring switch 230 interposed therebetween. 2062, a back-side vertical wall portion 2063 that faces the back plate 11c and connects the vertical wall portions 2501 and 2052, and a ceiling that is positioned above the hopper monitoring switch 230 and connects the vertical wall portions 2061, 2062, and 2063. And wall portion 2054. The switch cover 2050 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 11 b through the slits 2082 and 2083 formed at the base portion 1081 at the lower end edges of the vertical wall portions 2061, 2062 and 2063.

  The rear outer wall portion 2067 of the payout device 2065 (specifically, the housing 2066) of the hopper device 1060 has the above-described switch cover 2050, specifically, a cover housing portion 2068 for housing at least a part including the front opening portion thereof. Is formed. The cover accommodating portion 2068 has a concave shape that is recessed toward the front side in the mounting direction of the hopper device 2060, and is formed at the bottom thereof so as to contact the front end edges of the vertical wall portions 2051, 2052, and 2054 in the switch cover 2050. A rear wall 2069 is formed. That is, the front open portion provided on the switch cover 2050 is closed by the back wall 2069. The switch cover 2050, the lower plate 2080, and the hopper device 2060 form a closed space CS in which the hopper monitoring switch 230 is stored.

  In addition, a protruding piece 2070 that protrudes rearward is integrally formed on the back wall 2069 of the cover housing portion 2068. The protruding piece 2070 has a flat plate shape facing the base portion 2081 and is configured to fit into the closed space CS. More specifically, the protruding piece 2070 is formed corresponding to the contact portion 232 of the lever member 231, and the lever member 231 is pressed from above by the protruding piece 2070.

  Further, the cover housing portion 2068 has a top wall 2071 that faces the top wall portion 2054 of the switch cover 2050 and side walls 2072 and 2073 that face the vertical wall portions 2061 and 2062 of the switch cover 2050, respectively. The top wall 2071 and the side walls 2072 and 2073 are overlapped with the respective wall portions 2051, 2052 and 2054 of the switch cover 2050, and the contact portions 232 of the lever member 231 and the protruding piece 2070 are in contact with each other. It is formed to be larger than the slide amount S1 of the hopper device 2060 that moves in the above state. Each overlap allowance R1, R2, R3 indicates an overlap allowance when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the mounting direction of the hopper device 2060. Specifically, the overlap between the top wall portion 2054 and the top wall 2071 in the vertical direction. The margin of overlap between the left vertical wall portion 2061 and the left side wall 2072 in the horizontal direction is defined as “overlap margin R2”, and the margin of overlap between the right vertical wall portion 2062 and the right side wall 2073 in the horizontal direction is defined as “overlap margin”. R3 ".

  Here, based on FIGS. 62A and 62B, a description will be given of changes in the relative positions of the hopper monitoring switch 230 and the switch cover 2050 and the hopper device 2060 accompanying the detachment work of the hopper device 2060. FIG. 62A shows a state in which the hopper device 2060 is arranged outside the predetermined area, and FIG. 62B shows a state in which the hopper device 180 is arranged at the mounting completion position.

  When the hopper device 2060 is pushed into the back side of the housing 11 along the guide rail 153, first, the front opening portion of the switch cover 2050 is fitted into the cover housing portion 2068. Further, when the hopper device 2060 is pushed in, as shown in FIG. 62A, the tip of the protruding piece 2070 and the contact portion 232 of the lever member 231 come into contact with each other.

  When the hopper device 2060 is continuously pushed in and reaches a predetermined mounting completion position, the lever member 231 moves to a position where the protrusion is suppressed, and the hopper device 2060 is detected.

  On the other hand, when the hopper device 2060 is removed from the state where the hopper device 2060 is mounted as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the lever member 231 is released from the pressing piece 2070 when the hopper device 2060 is pulled out. Is done. That is, the protruding piece 2070 and the lever member 231 are separated. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), even when the protruding piece 2070 and the lever member 231 are moved to the maximum protruding position, the overlap between the switch cover 2050 and the cover accommodating portion 2068 is secured. Become. More specifically, access to the hopper monitoring switch 230 is blocked by the switch cover 2050 and the cover housing portion 2068 until at least the movement of the hopper device 2060 is detected by the hopper monitoring switch 230.

  In the modification described in detail above, it is possible to make it difficult to access the hopper monitoring switch 230, particularly when the movement of the hopper device 2060 is detected. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the hopper device 2060 is removed while the hopper monitoring switch 230 is illegally operated and the movement detection of the hopper device 2060 by the hopper monitoring switch 230 is avoided.

  In addition, since the hopper monitoring switch 230 is covered with the switch cover 2050, the rear exposure of the hopper monitoring switch 230 is avoided. A vent hole 247 is provided at the rear (back plate 11c) of the hopper device 2060. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the vent hole 247, the access to the hopper monitoring switch 230 is switched. It will be obstructed by the cover 2050. As a result, it is possible to improve heat dissipation while making fraud to the hopper monitoring switch 230 difficult, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  (31) The present invention may be applied to a game machine of a type different from the above embodiment, specifically, a ball-type game machine using a game ball as a game medium, a so-called pachinko machine. For example, a pachinko machine that unlocks a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine that generates a right when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, and other objects The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as pachinko machines, arrangement ball machines, and sparrow balls equipped with the above.

  In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a gaming machine main body that is supported by an outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and an intake device, and a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are obtained by the intake device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, in which rotation of a reel is started by operating a start lever after being taken in.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  In addition, the invention described in the following features is as follows: “A slot machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, includes a control board having an electronic component such as an MPU in which a control program related to a game is stored. A series of games are being controlled.In this type of gaming machine, a number of fraudulent acts such as changing the game contents by changing the MPU of the control board or the control board itself have been reported for the purpose of gaining unauthorized profits. Various countermeasures against fraud have been studied in the past, for example, one having a coupling means (so-called caulking structure) for mutually coupling a plurality of box structures constituting a substrate box. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1.) The coupling means is configured to require destruction when the coupling is released. Therefore, in order to facilitate the opening work of the substrate box during this inspection, a weak part is actively provided around the coupling means, and the weak part By destroying (cutting, etc.), the connection by the connecting means is released, and the substrate box can be opened.By confirming the destruction trace of such a weak part, when the substrate box is opened, With respect to the background art that “the opening history can be left and it is possible to detect when the board box is illegally opened,” the control board device having the above-mentioned coupling means is disclosed. However, it is conceivable that fraudulent acts are still being carried out, for example, by deliberately destroying the coupling means itself, leaving traces of destruction in the vulnerable part. There is a concern that it will be difficult to detect fraud on the control board if the trace of destruction is concealed in this way. However, it is generated in other game machines as well. ”The present invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

Feature A1. A control board (main control board 620) for controlling the game,
A substrate case (substrate box 630) in which an internal space is formed and the control board is accommodated in the internal space;
Holding means (pedestal unit 710) for detachably holding the substrate case;
A gaming machine comprising: a detection unit (main controller monitoring switch 790) that detects movement of the substrate case from a predetermined position when the substrate case is removed from the holding unit.

  According to the feature A1, when the substrate case is removed from the predetermined position when the substrate case is removed, the movement is detected by the detecting means. By monitoring the removal of the substrate case using the detection means, fraud with respect to the control substrate can be suppressed. Moreover, even if the control board is illegally exchanged, it is possible to easily grasp such a fact and suppress the occurrence of damage.

Feature A2. The board case is combined with each other to form a first case structure (for example, a front side structure 631) and a second case structure (for example, a back side structure 632) that form at least a part of the internal space of the board case. Prepared,
The holding means is configured to regulate separation of the first case structural body and the second case structural body at least in a state where the substrate case is disposed at the predetermined position. A gaming machine according to A1.

  According to the feature A2, in a state where the substrate case is disposed at a predetermined position, separation of both case components, that is, opening of the internal space of the substrate case is restricted. That is, separation of the first case component and the second case component is regulated while the substrate case is placed at a predetermined position. To remove the control board, it is necessary to first move the board case from a predetermined position. For example, it is necessary to remove the board case from the holding means, and it is difficult to access the control board by avoiding movement detection by the detecting means. It has become.

Feature A3. The substrate case is a component-side defining portion (for example, a front-side peripheral wall portion 645 of the front-side component 631) that defines the relative movement direction of the first case component and the second case component during the separation operation. And a back side peripheral wall 685) of the back side structure 632,
The holding means is a holder member that holds the substrate case by supporting or pinching the substrate case, and defines a relative movement direction of the substrate case and the holding means at the time of removing the substrate case. A holding means side defining portion (guide groove 761 etc.),
The structure-side defining part and the holding means-side defining part are the first case structure and the second case defined by the structure-side defining part at least in a state where the substrate case is disposed at the predetermined position. A game according to A1 or A2, characterized in that the relative movement direction of the structure is different from the relative movement direction of the substrate case and the holding means defined by the holding means side defining portion. Machine.

  According to the feature A3, the separation direction of the first case structure and the second case structure is different from the removal direction of the substrate case from the holding means (holder member), so that at least the substrate case is at a predetermined position. In the arranged state, the separation of the substrate case can be suppressed by the holding means side defining portion. By adopting the configuration shown in this feature, the configuration shown in feature A2 can be suitably realized.

Feature A4. The board case includes a first case structure (front-side structure 631) and a second case structure (back-side structure 632) that are combined with each other to form at least part of the internal space of the board case.
The control board is fixed to the first case structure,
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A3, wherein the detection means detects at least movement of the first case component from the predetermined position.

  In many cases, the substrate case is generally formed of a plurality of case components. In this case, by separating the substrate case in a state where the substrate case is disposed at a predetermined position, there may be a disadvantage that movement detection by the detection means is avoided. In this regard, as shown in this feature, it is preferable that at least the first case constituting body to be fixed to the control board is a detection target by the detection means, so that the control board is removed while avoiding detection by the detection means. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the element which stored the game control program is mounted in the control board, it is good to set it as the structure by which the element mounting surface side in a control board is covered with the said 1st case structure. When such a configuration is applied, the second case structure is disposed between the first case structure and the holding means, and the element mounting surface of the control board is directed to the side opposite to the holding means. Good. This makes it difficult to access the second case structure and makes it difficult to remove the element even if the second case structure is removed. Therefore, further improvement of crime prevention can be expected.

Feature A5. The holding means supports or sandwiches the substrate case by contacting the outer periphery of the substrate case,
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A4, wherein the detection unit is arranged in a region sandwiched between the substrate case and the holding unit.

  According to the feature A5, the exposure of the detection unit can be suppressed, and unauthorized access to the detection unit can be suppressed.

Feature A6. The detection means includes a sensor unit (an in / out pin 791) that detects the movement of the substrate case,
In the state where the substrate case is disposed at the predetermined position, at least a storage space (closed space CS) for storing the sensor unit is formed. Game machines.

  According to the feature A6, in the state where the substrate case is disposed at a predetermined position, an accommodation space for accommodating the sensor unit is formed. Thus, by exposing the sensor unit within the accommodation space, exposure of the sensor unit can be suppressed. Thereby, the action of obstructing the operation of the sensor unit can be suitably suppressed, which can contribute to further improvement of crime prevention. For example, the storage space may be configured by a shielded space or a closed space that suppresses exposure of the sensor unit to the outside of the storage space.

  Feature A7. The housing space is provided on a case side space forming part (for example, the front side peripheral wall part 645 of the front side structure 631 or the back side peripheral wall part 685 of the back side structure 632) provided on the substrate case side and the holding means side. A gaming machine according to A6, characterized in that it is formed by a combination with a holding means side space forming portion (for example, a guide groove 761).

  In the configuration in which the substrate case is detachably held, it is desirable that the detection means (specifically, the sensor unit) is hidden based on the mounting of the substrate case. However, for example, when the accommodation space is formed by one of the substrate case and the holding means, it may be difficult to access the detection means during maintenance or the like. This is not preferable from the viewpoint of workability. In this regard, in this feature, it is difficult to access the detection means when the substrate case is attached, and it is easy to access the detection means when the substrate case is removed. Thereby, the improvement of workability | operativity and the improvement of crime prevention can be made to make compatible both suitably.

  The “case-side space forming portion provided on the substrate case side” and the “holding-unit-side space forming portion provided on the holding means side” are positions based on relative movement between the substrate case and the holding means. They are arranged so that the relationship changes. Paying attention to this point, "the holding means side" indicates that the object to be provided with the holding means side space forming portion is not necessarily limited to the holding means, and may be a configuration associated with the holding means. ing. Similarly, “the substrate case side” indicates that the object to be provided with the case side space forming portion is not necessarily limited to the substrate case, and may be a configuration accompanying the substrate case.

Feature A8. The holding means is a holder member, and includes a passage-like holding means-side defining portion (a guide groove 761 and the like) that defines a relative movement direction of the substrate case and the holding means when the substrate case is removed.
The substrate case fits into the passage portion of the holding means side defining portion, and closes (eg, closes) the passage portion of the holding means side defining portion while the substrate case is disposed at the predetermined position. A front side wall portion 645 of the front side structure 631 and a back side wall portion 685) of the back side structure 632,
The detection means is provided so as to be switchable between a first position where the movement of the substrate case from the predetermined position is detected and a second position where the movement is not detected based on the relative movement of the substrate case and the holding means. A movable part (in / out pin 791),
The movable portion is configured to be switched between the first position and the second position by moving in a space closed by the holding means side defining portion and the closing portion. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A7.

  According to the feature A8, by disposing the substrate case at a predetermined position, exposure of the movable part in the detection unit can be suppressed by the substrate case and the holding unit. Since the movable part moves in a closed space from the outside of the substrate case and the holding means, it is possible to make it difficult to cause inconvenience that the movable part is accessed and position switching of the movable part is hindered. Therefore, further improvement in crime prevention can be expected.

  In the combination with the feature A7 and the feature A8, the “movable part” may be replaced with the “sensor part”.

Feature A9. The holding means is a holder member, and includes a holding means side defining portion (a guide groove 761 or the like) that defines a relative movement direction of the substrate case and the holding means when the substrate case is removed.
On the movement path along which the part to be detected by the detection means in the substrate case or the holding means moves based on the movement of the substrate case in the direction defined by the holding means side defining portion, the holding means and the The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A8, wherein fixing means for fixing the substrate case is disposed.

  According to the feature A9, the fixing means for fixing the holding means and the substrate case is provided, and the fixing means is arranged on the moving path along which the part to be detected by the detecting means moves. Thereby, the separation | separation of a detection means and the detection target part can be suppressed, and it can be made hard to produce the problem that the movement of the substrate case is detected sensitively due to the shakiness of the substrate case.

Feature A10. A mounting portion (back plate 11c of the housing 11) to which the holding means is mounted;
When the holding means is attached to the attachment portion, the detection means cannot be removed, and when the holding means is removed from the attachment portion, the detection means is allowed to be removed. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A9, further including an outer restricting portion (for example, a left bent portion 726 of the base member 720 and a bulging portion 823 of the sub-control device 800).

  According to feature A10, in order to remove the detection means, it is first necessary to remove the holding means from the mounting portion. In this way, by setting a predetermined work procedure for removing the detection means, the labor of the removal work can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the removal means can be removed even when the holding means is attached to the attachment portion. Increase. Thereby, the cheating with respect to a detection means can be suppressed.

  Feature A11. As described in any one of A1 to A10, which has a holding means removal restricting portion that restricts removal of the holding means in a state where at least the substrate case is disposed at the predetermined position. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A11, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the control board (board case) is removed together with the holding means. Thereby, it can avoid that the movement detection by a detection means becomes easy to be avoided, and can contribute to the improvement of crime prevention.

Feature A12. A fixing tool (for example, a fixing tool 1180) for fixing the holding means to the mounting portion;
Any of A1 to A11, wherein at least one of the substrate case and the holding means is located on the removal track of the fixture, at least in a state where the substrate case is disposed at the predetermined position. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A12, at least one of the substrate case and the holding unit is positioned on the removal track of the fixture by the substrate case or the holding unit in a state where at least the substrate case is disposed at the predetermined position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing means from being illegally removed from the mounting portion, and it is possible to make it difficult for the substrate case to be replaced with the holding means.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A12, wherein the detection means is attached to the holding means.

  In order to notify the detection result by the detection means, it may be necessary to connect the detection means to another device. If the detection means is mounted on the game medium discharge means, it is assumed that a release operation for releasing the connection is necessary for the attachment / detachment of the game medium discharge means, and there is a concern that the work becomes complicated. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the detection means is attached to the holding means, the above-described inconveniences can be solved, and the complexity of the work can be suppressed.

Feature A14. The detection means is provided so as to be switchable between both a first position that detects movement of the substrate case from the predetermined position and a second position that is not detected.
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A13, wherein switching between the first position and the second position is performed based on relative movement between the substrate case and the holding unit.

  According to the feature A14, the position of the detection unit is switched based on the relative movement (that is, the change in the relative position) between the substrate case and the holding unit. In this way, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by using the mobile detection means.

  Specifically, fraud to the board case can occur not only when power is supplied to the game but also when power supply is interrupted (for example, at night) when power supply is interrupted. For this reason, it is preferable that the movement detection of the substrate case is performed even when the power supply is cut off. In such a case, if an optical non-contact sensor or the like is used, it is necessary to provide a power storage unit that stores power to be supplied to the sensor or the like when the power supply is cut off, and to further increase the power storage capacity of the power storage unit. This is not preferable from the viewpoint of power saving. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration has a movable detection means, the power for operating the detection means can be reduced, which contributes to power saving.

Feature A15. A remaining unit (for example, the sub-control device 800) that leaves the number of times the movement of the substrate case is detected by the detection unit;
The board case and the holding means are provided so as to be able to be broken or removed, and when the board case is broken or removed, the board case can be detached from the holding means, and the board case has been removed. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A14, comprising a plurality of trace means (for example, a support portion 668 of the box side coupling portion 667) for leaving a trace.

  According to the feature A15, by allowing the number of detections to remain by the remaining means, it becomes possible for the hall manager or the like to perform an illegal confirmation work at an arbitrary timing. For example, assuming a configuration in which only one detection result is stored, it is necessary to delete the old detection result in order to obtain the latest detection result. This is not preferable because confirmation of past opening history (for example, fraud facts) can be difficult. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the number of times remains, it can be understood later that there is a possibility of fraud, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized. Note that it is more preferable that the number of detections be left as a history (for example, data including information such as the date and time when the detection was performed). Incidentally, the “remaining means” can be replaced with, for example, “storage means” for storing the number of times of detection.

  Moreover, the removal fact remains as a trace with the removal of the substrate case. By comparing the number of traces by the trace means and the number of detections by the remaining means, it is possible to more accurately grasp whether or not unauthorized removal has been performed.

Feature A16. Control means (monitoring side MPU 811) for executing monitoring control of whether or not movement of the substrate case is detected;
Informing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 410) controlled by the control means so as to execute the notice based on the fact that the movement of the substrate case is specified by the control means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A15, wherein:

  According to the feature A16, when the substrate case is moved, the fact is notified by the notification means. For this reason, even if the substrate case is illegal, it is possible to prompt the hall manager to confirm the fact and contribute to early detection of the illegality.

Feature A17. Control means (monitoring side MPU 811) for executing monitoring control of whether or not movement of the substrate case is detected;
Based on the fact that the movement of the substrate case is specified by the control means, output means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 410) controlled by the control means so as to output detection information outside the gaming machine. Or an external concentration terminal board 900), the gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A13.

  According to the feature A17, when the substrate case is moved, the detection information is output to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a computer for hall management) by the output means. For this reason, even if the substrate case is illegal, it is possible to prompt the hall manager to confirm the fact, and contribute to early detection of the illegality.

  The “output unit” includes, for example, a “transmission unit” that transmits a signal or the like.

Feature A18. An opening / closing body (front door 12 and inner door 400) that is rotatably supported by a support object and is arranged in front of the detection means,
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A17, wherein the detection means is arranged to be biased toward a rotation base end side of the opening / closing body.

  According to the feature A18, since the opening / closing body is arranged on the front side of the detection means, that is, the detection means is arranged on the rear side of the opening / closing body, the detection means is covered from the front side by the opening / closing body. . In order to access the detection means (substrate case) arranged on the rear side of the opening / closing body, it is necessary to first open the opening / closing body. Particularly in this feature, the detection means is arranged biased toward the rotation base end side of the opening / closing body. For this reason, in order to facilitate access to the detection means, it is necessary to increase the opening amount of the opening / closing body. Thus, the act of opening the opening / closing body greatly makes it easier to draw the attention of the surroundings. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the detection means, which can contribute to further improvement of crime prevention.

Feature A19. Comprising control means (monitoring side MPU 811) for performing monitoring control as to whether or not movement of the substrate case is detected;
The detection means is arranged biased to one side of the substrate case,
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A18, wherein the control unit is arranged on the same side as the side on which the detection unit is arranged in the board case.

  According to feature A19, the detection means and the control means are arranged on the same side. Thus, by arranging both close to each other, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length of the harness that electrically connects the control means and the detection means. Like the detection means, the harness is assumed to be subject to fraud. In this respect, by suppressing the spread of parts that are likely to be fraudulent, it is possible to limit places that require fraud confirmation. For this reason, even if fraud is performed, the discovery can be facilitated.

Feature B1. A housing (housing 11) opened in front of the gaming machine;
A control device (for example, a main control device 610) that performs various controls relating to the game, and a design variation display device (reel device 550) that displays the design variation during the game, the control device and the design variation display device are arranged in the unit main body (inside A display unit (replacement unit 300) mounted on the housing 310);
A support member (partition plate 251) for detachably supporting the display unit;
A board (external concentration terminal board 900) provided at a position facing the display unit on a predetermined inner wall surface of the housing;
A plate surface facing the display unit on the substrate has a first connector (first connector 901) formed so that a connection direction is substantially parallel to the plate surface, and a connection direction is relative to the plate surface. A second connector (second connector 902) formed so as to be substantially vertical,
The substrate is disposed so that one end of the substrate is located inside the housing from the other end,
The gaming machine, wherein the first connector is disposed at a position closer to the one end than the second connector.

  According to the feature B1, the first connector and the second connector are arranged so that the first connector is located at one end side with respect to the second connector. The degree of increase in the amount of protrusion of the first connector from the inner wall surface of the housing based on the inclination of the board is greater than the degree of increase in the amount of protrusion of the second connector from the inner wall surface. Thereby, the first connector can be brought closer to the inside of the housing while suppressing the protrusion of the second connector. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the connecting operation of the first connector while suppressing the protrusion of the substrate from the inner wall surface, and it is possible to contribute to securing the capacity of the display unit and facilitating the connecting operation of the connector.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to B1, wherein the connection portion (inserted port 903) of the first connector faces away from the side where the second connector is provided.

  In the configuration in which the board is inclined, the effect shown in the feature B1 is more remarkable by directing the connection portion of the first connector opposite to the side where the second connector is provided as shown in this feature. It can be.

Feature B3. The casing is provided with an insertion hole portion (such as a through hole for harness 938) through which wiring is inserted from the outside of the casing into the casing.
The gaming machine according to B1 or B2, wherein the board is disposed below the insertion hole.

  It is assumed that the wiring inserted into the housing through the insertion hole is likely to hang down due to its own weight. By arranging the substrate below the insertion hole, the wiring can be easily brought closer to the substrate. As a result, the connection work between the substrate and the wiring can be facilitated.

  Feature B4. The inclination of the substrate is set so that the amount of protrusion of the first connector from the inner wall surface (the amount of protrusion d1) is equal to the amount of protrusion of the second connector from the inner wall surface (the amount of protrusion d2). The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B3, wherein

  As shown in feature B4, by setting the inclination of the board so that the protruding amounts of both connectors are equal, the connection work of the first connector is made easier while suppressing the protrusion of the board from the inner wall surface. can do. Thereby, ensuring of the capacity | capacitance of a display unit and improvement of workability | operativity can be made to make compatible both suitably.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B4, wherein the second connector is disposed near the other end.

  By disposing the second connector near the other end of the substrate, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the protruding amount of the second connector based on the inclination of the substrate. The effect shown in the feature B1 can be made more remarkable. For example, the second connector may be disposed along the other end.

  Feature B6. The gaming machine according to B5, wherein the second connector has a plurality of connection terminals, and the connection terminals are arranged along the other end.

  As shown in feature B6, the connection terminals of the second connector are arranged along the other end of the substrate. Thus, in the configuration having a plurality of connection terminals, by devising the arrangement of the connection terminals, it is possible to suppress the area occupied by the second connector on the board from becoming larger on the first connector side. . Thereby, even if it employs a configuration in which the second connector has a plurality of connection terminals, an increase in the protruding amount of the second connector based on the inclination of the substrate can be suitably suppressed, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature B7. The substrate has a substantially rectangular shape,
One of the long sides of the substrate is the one end, and the other is the other end, and the gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B6.

  According to the feature B7, the substrate has a long plate shape. By configuring the “one end” and the “other end” with the long side of the substrate, the protrusions of the substrate are the same as compared with the case where the “one end” and the “other end” are configured with the short side of the substrate. It becomes easy to increase the inclination of the substrate when the substrate is inclined.

  Feature B8. The unit main body includes an opening (an upper opening 347 of the right side plate portion 310e) formed so that the first connector and the second connector are exposed when viewed from inside the display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B7.

  As shown in feature B8, in the configuration in which the unit main body has an opening, the connector can be accessed through the opening. If a connector connection operation or a connection release operation is performed through the opening, each operation can be completed with the display unit mounted. As described above, since the attaching / detaching operation of the display unit accompanying the connecting / disconnecting operation of the connector is not necessary, complication of the operation can be suppressed.

  Further, if it is possible to perform the connector connection work with the display unit mounted, it is not necessary to set an operation gap for the terminals connected to each connector. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure the capacity of the display unit.

  Feature B9. The substrate is tilted such that a virtual line extending from the first connector in the connection direction of the first connector and a virtual line extending from the second connector in the connection direction of the second connector pass through the opening. The gaming machine according to B8, which is set.

  According to the feature B9, the inclination of the board is set so that an imaginary line extending from each connector passes through the opening. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to connect the connector through the opening, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature B10. A holding portion (clamp portion 945) for holding the wiring connected to the second connector;
The gaming machine according to B8 or B9, wherein the opening is formed so that the holding portion is exposed when viewed from inside the display unit.

  According to the feature B10, since the wiring is held by the holding unit, it is possible to easily avoid catching between the display unit and the wiring when the display unit is moved. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as disconnection.

  A practically preferable configuration can be realized by forming the opening so that the holding portion is exposed when viewed from inside the display unit. Specifically, the wiring connected to the second connector can be made to wait in advance at a position accessible through the opening. Accordingly, when the connector connection work is performed after the display unit is mounted, the connection work can be easily performed.

  Feature B11. One of B1 to B10 is provided with a holding member (holder member 920) for holding the substrate in an inclined state, and the substrate is attached to the inner wall surface via the holding member. The gaming machine described.

  As shown in the features B1 to B10, in order to attach the substrate to the housing in an inclined state, the holding member shown in this feature may be used. Thereby, the inclined arrangement of the substrate can be easily realized.

  Feature B12. A provision for defining a moving direction of the display unit (a rail member 270 of the partition plate 250 unit) so as to avoid interference between the display unit and the substrate when the display unit is attached or detached; The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B11, which is characterized.

  According to the feature B12, the attaching / detaching direction of the display unit is defined. That is, the variation in the attachment / detachment orbit of the display unit is suppressed, and interference with the display unit is avoided. As described above, by adopting a configuration that suppresses variations, it is possible to reduce an operation gap between the substrate (specifically, the first connector and the second connector) and the display unit. That is, it becomes easy to secure the capacity of the display unit. Therefore, the dead space generated between the display unit and the housing can be reduced, which can contribute to the improvement of crime prevention.

Feature C1. A housing (housing 11) opened in front of the gaming machine;
A pattern display device (reel device 550) that has a plurality of rotating bodies (for example, reels 555) in which a plurality of types of patterns are arranged in the circumferential direction and displays the patterns by rotating these rotating bodies, and controls related to games. A display unit (replacement unit 300) in which a control device (for example, main control device 610) to perform is mounted on the unit body (inner housing 310);
In the gaming machine that detachably accommodates the display unit in the housing,
A coupling means that makes it impossible to remove the display unit from the casing based on the coupling process, and allows the display unit to be detached from the casing in a state where a trace remains based on the coupling release process. For example, a gaming machine provided with fixing means 450).

  According to the feature C1, when the display unit is removed from the housing, a coupling release process is necessary, and traces remain based on the coupling cancellation process. Thus, by leaving the trace of the coupling release, it is possible to easily grasp the fact that the display unit has been removed. The display unit has a configuration unique to each model such as a picture display device and a control device, and the model of the gaming machine can be changed by exchanging the display unit. As described above, in a gaming machine in which the display unit is supposed to be removed, there is a concern that the display unit is illegally replaced. In this regard, in this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to perform illegal replacement of the display unit by making it possible to grasp the fact that the display unit is removed as described above. Furthermore, even if the display unit is illegally replaced, the fact can be easily found.

Feature C2. A gaming machine in which the display unit is removed by moving the display unit in a predetermined removal direction,
The coupling means includes
A communication hole (for example, a recess in the housing 11) provided in the housing and the unit main body and extending in a direction intersecting the removing direction and communicating with the display unit in a state where the display unit is disposed at a predetermined mounting position. 138 and the unit side insertion hole 343 of the inner housing 310),
An insertion member (insertion member 460) that restricts movement of the display unit in the removal direction by being inserted into the communication hole portion and arranged at a predetermined insertion position;
A restricting portion (locking portions 503 and 504) for restricting movement of the insertion member from the predetermined insertion position, and the insertion from the predetermined insertion position in a state in which the trace is left based on the restriction release processing. The gaming machine according to C1, further comprising: a restricting member (a restricting member 500) having a release operation portion (for example, the connecting portions 526 and 527) that enables movement of the member.

  According to the feature C2, removal of the display unit from the housing is restricted by the insertion member being disposed at a predetermined insertion position. Specifically, the communication hole portion through which the insertion member is inserted intersects the removal direction of the display unit, and the movement of the display unit in the removal direction is restricted by using the insertion member inserted into the communication hole portion. . Moreover, the drop-out of the insertion member from the communication hole is avoided by the restriction member. Thereby, the movement restriction | limiting of a display unit will be maintained suitably. By configuring the coupling means with a plurality of members provided with separate and independent functions in this way, it is possible to easily secure these functions. For example, even when a position shift or the like occurs in the display unit and a load is generated in a direction in which the insertion member is sheared, it is possible to easily suppress the load from reaching the regulating member. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the inconvenience that the movement restriction of the insertion member is easily released by applying a load to the restriction member through the insertion member. Thereby, the movement of the display unit can be suitably suppressed by the coupling means.

  Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide the insertion member with a function of suppressing its own dropout, the rigidity of the insertion member can be easily ensured. Since the display unit has various configurations such as a picture display device, it tends to be heavy. For this reason, when the display unit is pulled out or when the display unit is tilted, it is assumed that a large load is easily applied to the insertion member. In this respect, by making it easy to ensure the rigidity of the insertion member, it is possible to easily avoid the inconvenience that the insertion member is deformed or damaged by the load as described above.

  For example, the direction in which the display unit is detached and the direction in which the communication hole extends may be orthogonal to each other. Thereby, it can suppress suitably that the load added to a control member via an insertion member is added.

  The “restriction release process” shown in this feature constitutes a part of the “combination release process” shown in the feature C1. That is, the “binding release process” includes a process of moving the insertion member from a predetermined insertion position in addition to the restriction release process.

  Feature C3. The release operation part is a weak part (for example, a long plate part) formed so as to be easily broken so as to release the movement restriction of the insertion member more easily than when the movement restriction of the insertion member is released by breaking the restriction part. 535, 536), the gaming machine according to C2.

  According to the feature C3, by destroying (for example, cutting) the fragile portion of the release operation portion, the destruction trace remains. That is, it is possible to grasp the fact that the display unit has been removed from the destruction trace. In addition, it is assumed that it is difficult to regulate the removal of the insertion member using the regulation member once broken. Therefore, it is also possible to grasp that the insertion member or the regulating member is not attached as a trace that the display unit has been removed. Thereby, even if it is a case where fraud with respect to a display unit (for example, control board) is made, it can make it easy to grasp the fact.

Feature C4. The restricting portion is displaced by being elastically deformed to a position where the display unit or the housing is hooked and a position where the hook is released,
The coupling means has a plurality of the restricting portions,
The game machine according to C3, wherein the fragile part is formed so as to connect the respective restricting parts.

  In a configuration in which the release operation part (specifically, the weak part) is destroyed and the restriction member cannot be reused, the destroyed part is re-coupled by a fixing means such as an adhesive, and the restriction member is illegally reconnected. There is concern about being used. In this regard, in this feature, the fragile portion is formed so as to connect the restricting portions. For this reason, even if the broken portion of the release operation portion is re-coupled to try to use it illegally, stress is likely to occur in the broken portion based on the elastic deformation of the restricting portion. That is, the stress is likely to be generated so as to separate the broken portion with the displacement between the two positions of the restricting portion. That is, it is easy to separate the part once destroyed. As a result, it is difficult to reuse the used regulating member, and the inconvenience that the destruction trace is concealed can be made difficult to occur.

  Feature C5. The gaming machine according to any one of C2 to C4, wherein the restriction member is arranged such that the release operation portion protrudes from the unit main body to the inside of the display unit.

  According to the feature C5, since the release operation part protrudes inward from the unit main body, it is possible to easily perform the release operation (that is, the coupling release process).

  In particular, in the combination with the feature C3 and the feature C4 (configuration having a fragile portion), it is possible to easily confirm the trace by causing the fragile portion to protrude inward from the unit main body. Even if the used restricting member is illegally used by rejoining the broken part with adhesive etc., the release operation part protrudes inside the unit body, making it easier to notice and discover It can be easy.

  Feature C6. The housing, the display unit, and the restriction in the same direction as the removal direction of the display unit between the housing, the display unit, and the restriction member on the front side and the back side of the display unit in the removal direction. The gaming machine according to any one of C2 to C5, wherein a gap that allows relative movement with the member is formed.

  According to the feature C6, even when the display unit is pulled in the removal direction with the coupling means attached, it is possible to prevent the casing, the display unit, and the regulating member from being used. That is, it is possible to avoid the stress generated due to the display unit being pulled from being transmitted to the regulating member. Thereby, deformation and breakage of the restricting member are less likely to occur, that is, the restricting member can be protected, and the display unit removal restriction by the coupling means can be made suitable.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to any one of C2 to C6, wherein the communication hole is open at least inside the display unit.

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to attach the insertion member from the inside of the display unit, which can contribute to facilitating the coupling process. If the communication hole is open to the outside of the housing, it is necessary to mount the insertion member from the outside of the housing. Generally, the casing is fixed to the island facility, and exposure of portions other than the front open portion is suppressed by the island facility and surrounding game machines. For this reason, in order to perform the mounting operation of the insertion member from the outside of the casing, it may be necessary to perform the operation by, for example, turning the display unit into the casing and then turning around the island facility. This is not preferable because it causes a complicated work. In this regard, if the insertion member can be attached from the inside of the display unit as described above, the insertion operation of the insertion member can be continued as it is after the display unit is pushed into the housing. Therefore, even if a configuration having a coupling means (specifically, an insertion member) is adopted, it is possible to make it difficult to cause inconveniences such as complicated display unit installation work. That is, it is possible to suitably achieve both workability related to the attachment of the display unit and improvement of crime prevention.

  Moreover, according to this feature, the above-described mounting operation can be performed in a state where the casing is installed in the island facility. In other words, there is no need to go to the island facility side to install the insertion member, or to remove the housing from the island facility once and attach the insertion member to the island facility again, simplifying the work. Can contribute.

  Feature C8. The insertion member has a wall portion (first opposing wall portion 481) located between a boundary between the casing and the display unit in the communication hole portion and the regulating member. A gaming machine according to any one of C7 to C7.

  According to the feature C8, unauthorized access (physical contact) to the restricting member can be suppressed by the insertion member. Specifically, even if an unauthorized tool or the like is inserted through the boundary between the housing and the display unit, the insertion member can prevent access to the restriction member. As a result, the inconvenience that the restricting member is illegally operated by a fraudulent tool inserted from the boundary is less likely to occur, which can contribute to the improvement of crime prevention.

Feature C9. The regulation part is
Locking portions (locking claw portions 511 and 512) for restricting movement of the insertion member from the predetermined insertion position by being hooked on the display unit or the housing;
A deformable portion (arm portions 506, 507) that displaces the locking portion to the side where the locked state is released by elastic deformation;
Any one of C2 to C8, wherein the deforming portion is formed so that a displacement direction of the deforming portion toward the side where the locked state is released intersects with a removing direction of the display unit. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature C9, the direction in which the display unit is removed intersects the direction in which the arm portion is released toward the release side. For this reason, even if the position variation in the removal direction occurs, the arm portion is elastically deformed due to such position variation, and the inconvenience that the engagement of the locking portion is reduced is less likely to occur. . Further, for example, even when the display unit is pulled in the removal direction without removing the coupling means, there is little inconvenience that the engagement of the locking portion is reduced thereby. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the display unit is removed without performing a predetermined release process (destruction of the release operation unit), that is, without leaving a trace.

  Feature C10. Between the locking portion and the deformation portion and the insertion member, there is a gap that allows relative movement of the locking portion and the deformation portion and the insertion member in the same direction as the removal direction of the display unit. The gaming machine according to C9, which is formed.

  According to the feature C10, the same effect as the feature C6 is produced. Specifically, even when the display unit is pulled in the removal direction and a load is applied to the insertion member, it is possible to make it difficult for such a load to be transmitted to the locking portion and the deformation portion of the restricting member. Thereby, unauthorized removal of the regulating member can be suppressed, and further, the regulating member can be protected.

  Feature C11. The game machine according to C9 or C10, wherein the deformable portion and the locking portion are surrounded by the communication hole portion.

  Although it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of the regulating member by adopting the configuration including the deforming portion and the locking portion, the regulating member can be easily removed without destroying the release operation portion by an unauthorized operation on the deforming portion or the locking portion. There is concern. This is not preferable from the viewpoint of improving crime prevention. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the deforming portion and the locking portion are surrounded by the communication hole portion, that is, a configuration in which the deformation portion and the locking portion are accommodated in the communication hole portion, unauthorized access to the deformation portion and the locking portion can be suppressed. . Thereby, the improvement of workability | operativity and the improvement of crime prevention can be made compatible.

  For example, an insertion hole portion (guide passage portions 494 and 495) through which the deforming portion and the locking portion of the restriction member are inserted may be formed in the insertion member. In other words, an accommodating portion (guide passage portions 494 and 495) that accommodates the deforming portion and the locking portion of the restricting member may be formed in the insertion member. Thereby, it becomes possible to enclose a deformation | transformation part and a latching | locking part doubly by a communicating hole part and an insertion member, and can anticipate the further improvement of crime prevention.

Feature C12. A locking member (upper plate 140) provided on one of the housing and the display unit and hooked on the locking portion of the regulating member;
The gaming machine according to any one of C9 to C11, wherein the other of the casing and the display unit is disposed on a removal track of the locking member.

  It is not preferable from the viewpoint of crime prevention that the load is applied to the hooked portion and the restriction member is removed without causing the breakage of the restriction member. Furthermore, it is not preferable from the viewpoint of manufacturability that the moldability of the housing or the unit main body deteriorates due to securing the strength of the portion to be caught. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the locking member is formed separately, it is possible to easily secure the strength while facilitating the formation of the hooked portion. That is, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the crime prevention performance while avoiding the difficulty of manufacturing the housing and the display unit, and a preferable configuration can be realized from both the viewpoint of the crime prevention property and the manufacturability. For example, the locking member may be formed of a material (for example, a metal material) having a strength higher than that of the housing.

  Incidentally, it is also possible to have a configuration having a fixture for fixing the locking member to the object to be arranged. In this case, what is necessary is just to set it as the structure which covers the exposed part (for example, operation part) of a fixing tool with a display unit and a housing | casing. When it is set as the structure which has a locking member, it is assumed that the locking member and a fixing tool will become a subject of fraud. In this respect, by covering the exposed portion of the fixture as described above, unauthorized removal and movement of the locking member can be suitably suppressed, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature C13. The restriction member includes a plurality of sets of the locking part and the deformation part as the restriction part, and the release operation part is disposed so as to protrude from the unit main body to the inside of the display unit,
The release operation part is provided across the respective deformed parts of each set, and it is easier to release the movement restriction of the insertion member than when the movement of the insertion member is released by destroying the restriction part. It is a fragile part formed so as to be easily destroyed,
Furthermore, a plurality of the release operation units are provided, and one of the plurality of release operation units is formed so as to be located inside the unit main body with respect to the other release operation units. The gaming machine according to any one of C9 to C12.

  According to the feature C13, by destroying the release operation unit, it is possible to remove the insertion member (that is, the coupling means) in a state where the trace remains. Moreover, the release operation part is formed ranging over each deformation | transformation part, and it becomes possible to suppress the excessive deformation | transformation of a deformation | transformation part.

  It is desirable to form the release operation unit as weak as possible in view of being a target for destruction. In view of the point that the restricting portions are connected by the release operation portion and excessive deformation of the deforming portions and unintentional separation between the restricting portions are restricted, it is preferable that the restricting portions are formed to be as strong as possible. In this feature, by providing a plurality of release operation units and arranging these release operation units offset inside and outside, it is possible to suitably satisfy both conflicting functions. That is, it is possible to improve the support strength by arranging the release operation portion offset inside and outside. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the strength (for example, thickness) of each release operation unit while securing the supporting strength of the deformed portion by the entire release operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as removing the coupling means without leaving traces (ie, without causing destruction) by improperly deforming the deforming portion while facilitating the destruction operation of the release operation portion. It has become.

  Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C13, wherein the coupling means is biased and arranged on the open part side of the housing.

  The display unit has various configurations such as a picture display device and a control device. For this reason, when the coupling means is arranged on the rear side of the housing, there is a concern that the visual recognition of the coupling means, the coupling process, and the coupling release process are hindered by these various configurations. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the coupling means (especially the regulating member) is biased and arranged on the open part side of the housing, that is, the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the coupling means, It is possible to facilitate the debonding process. In particular, by making it easy to confirm the trace, complication of the confirmation work can be suppressed, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  Feature C15. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C14, wherein the insertion member is formed with higher strength than the restriction member.

  When the coupling means includes the insertion member and the regulating member, each member can be formed using different materials. Since the insertion member is likely to be subjected to a load based on the displacement of the display unit or the like, it is preferable that the insertion member has a higher strength than the restriction member. By making the insertion member high in strength, it is possible to suppress its own deformation. Thereby, the position shift and movement of the display unit can be suitably suppressed, and further, an illegal act of deforming the insertion member and removing the coupling means can be made difficult.

  In particular, in combination with the features C9 to C12, it is possible to easily cause elastic deformation of the deformed portion by suppressing the strength of the restricting member. Thereby, the attachment operation | work of a control member can be made easy. Furthermore, in the combination with the feature C3, the feature C4, etc., the restriction release processing (the destruction of the restriction member) can be facilitated.

  As described above in detail, the insertion member and the restricting member have different strengths according to their roles, thereby ensuring the security of the coupling function between the display unit and the housing and facilitating the work related to the coupling means. Can be compatible.

Feature C16. Provided with a support member (partition plate 251) provided in the housing and detachably supporting the display unit;
The support member is formed such that the display unit can be detached from the housing based on the slide movement of the display unit along the support member. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C16, the display unit is supported by the support member. That is, by receiving the weight of the display unit by the support member, the weight of the display unit is hardly applied to the coupling means. Thus, by reducing the load applied to the coupling means, it is not necessary to increase the strength of the coupling means unnecessarily. Therefore, it is possible to favorably achieve both of ensuring the bond strength and facilitating the release operation.

  For example, by providing a defining portion (for example, the rail member 270 or the guide groove 360) that regulates the removal direction of the display unit, the function of restricting the movement of the display unit in the coupling means is the same as the movement restriction function in the removal direction. The rigidity (strength) of the coupling means can be ensured more easily.

Feature C17. The support member supports the display unit from the lower side of the display unit,
The gaming machine according to C16, wherein the coupling means is disposed on an upper portion of the display unit.

  According to the feature C17, the display unit can be easily attached by placing the display unit on the support member and pushing the display unit toward the back of the housing. However, when the display unit is configured to be supported from below, it is assumed that the display unit rotates (tilts) with the support member side as the base end. In this regard, in this feature, the coupling means is arranged on the upper part of the display unit, that is, on the rotation tip side. Thereby, rotation of the display unit as described above can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C18. In the vicinity of the portion of the display unit that is supported by the support member, a blocking state that prevents the display unit from moving in the removal direction and a blocking release state that allows the display unit to move in the removal direction. A plurality of blocking members (locking members 260) formed to be switchable are provided,
The blocking means are arranged side by side on the left and right, and the coupling means is arranged so as to be on the left side of the blocking member arranged on the right side of the blocking members and on the right side of the blocking member arranged on the leftmost side. A gaming machine according to C17, characterized in that:

  The relative position between the support member and the display unit in the vertical direction is less likely to shift due to the weight of the display unit. In particular, at a position close to the support portion, the relative position shift between the display unit and the support member tends to be small. As shown in this feature, by disposing the blocking member in the vicinity of the support portion, it is possible to prevent the switching operation of the blocking member from becoming difficult due to the positional deviation between the display unit and the support member. .

  Further, by arranging the blocking members side by side, it is possible to make it difficult to produce a left-right rotation with one blocking member as the base end. Moreover, it can suppress that operation of one blocking member becomes difficult compared with the other by making the arrangement direction of a blocking member into right and left. Thereby, a practically preferable configuration is realized.

  In particular, in this feature, the coupling means is disposed so as to be on the left side of the blocking member disposed on the rightmost side among the blocking members and on the right side of the blocking member disposed on the leftmost side. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the display unit around the virtual straight line connecting the blocking members in a balanced manner. Even if the display unit is pulled while the blocking member is in the blocked state and the coupling means is mounted, the load generated due to such an operation is not limited to the one blocking member or coupling means. Can make it difficult to concentrate on.

Feature D1. A housing (housing 11) opened in front of the gaming machine;
A control device (for example, a main control device 610) that performs various controls relating to the game, and a pattern display device (reel device 550) that displays and displays a pattern during the game, the control device and the pattern display device are connected to the unit main body (inner housing). 310) display unit (replacement unit 3)
00)
A housing side connector (housing connectors 851, 852) provided on the housing side;
Unit-side connectors (replacement connectors 881 and 882) that are provided on the display unit side and are coupled to the housing-side connector as the display unit moves toward the back of the housing;
When the display unit is attached to the housing, the restricting means for restricting the movement of the display unit in the direction intersecting the attaching direction of the display unit (the guide of the rail member 270 of the partition plate unit 250 and the surface changing unit 300). Groove 360),
In the section in which the display unit moves to the mounting completion position when the display unit is mounted on the housing by the restriction means, a first restriction section and a second restriction section having a higher restriction level than the first restriction section However, the first restriction section is set to the front side and the second restriction section is set to the back side,
The gaming machine, wherein the second restriction section includes a connector coupling section for coupling the housing side connector and the unit side connector.

  According to the feature D1, the display unit can be mounted on the casing by pushing the unit main body into the back of the casing while the unit main body is in contact with the support member. Based on the pushing operation of the display unit, the unit side connector provided on the display unit side and the case side connector provided on the case side are coupled. As a result, the display unit and the casing are electrically connected. Thus, the complication of work is suppressed by integrating the pushing operation of the display unit and the connecting operation of the connector.

  In this feature, in particular, the first restriction section and the second restriction section are set in the section in which the display unit moves to the mounting completion position by the restricting means, and the movement (direction) differs in the direction other than the mounting direction. It was set as the structure regulated by. As a result, when the display unit is mounted, it is possible to suppress rough position variations in the first restriction section and to suppress fine position variations in the second restriction section. That is, in the initial stage of mounting, it is possible to improve workability by securing the workability by lowering the regulation level, and at the end of mounting stage, the positioning accuracy can be improved by raising the regulation level.

  In the state where the position variation of the display unit is suppressed in the second restriction section, the connector is connected, so that the unit side connector and the housing side connector can be suitably combined. Thereby, it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience that the connectors collide and the connector pins are deformed or broken.

  For example, the second restriction section may be configured to have a connector coupling section and a non-connector coupling section, and the non-connector coupling section may be set to the front side and the connector coupling section to the back side. Thereby, before the housing side connector and the unit side connector are coupled, the position variation of the display unit can be suitably suppressed, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  Incidentally, the “restriction level” indicates, for example, the degree to which the display unit is allowed to move in a direction intersecting the display unit mounting direction.

Feature D2. The restricting means includes a unit side restricting portion (guide groove 360) provided in the display unit and a housing side restricting portion (rail member 270) provided on the housing side,
One of the unit side regulating portion and the housing side regulating portion is provided with a pair of wall portions (for example, vertical wall portions 276 to 281) that extend in the mounting direction and face each other at a predetermined interval.
The other of the unit side restricting portion and the housing side restricting portion is accommodated in a region sandwiched between the two wall portions and faces each of the wall portions from the inside (for example, facing wall portions 366 to 371). Is provided,
The gaming machine according to D1, wherein the first restricting section and the second restricting section are set so that a gap between the wall portion and the facing portion is different in size.

  In order to set the first restriction section and the second restriction section, as shown in this feature, the unit side restriction section and the housing side restriction section may be configured so that the gap size between the wall portion and the facing portion is different in size. . In detail, it is good to set so that the clearance dimension of the wall part and opposing part in a 2nd control area may become smaller than the clearance dimension of the wall part and opposing part in a 1st control area. Thereby, the technical idea shown in the feature D1 can be realized with a simple configuration.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to D2, wherein the second restriction section is configured such that a distance between the both wall portions is constant.

  According to the feature D3, by making the interval between the both wall portions constant, it is possible to easily suppress variations in the mounting track of the display unit that has reached the second restriction section. Thereby, the holding | grip etc. of a unit side connector and a housing | casing side connector can be suppressed suitably.

  Feature D4. The boundary between the first restriction section and at least the second restriction section is configured such that the distance between the wall portions gradually increases in the direction of removing the display unit. A gaming machine according to D2 or D3.

  According to the feature D4, the interval between the both wall portions is configured to gradually widen in the removal direction of the display unit (for example, the front side in the mounting direction). The position variation of the display unit can be gradually reduced in the first restriction section. In other words, it is possible to easily allow variation in the position of the display unit in the initial stage of mounting. Thereby, security of workability | operativity can be aimed at.

  In particular, in the combination with the feature D3, it is preferable that the distance between the wall portions in the second restriction section is set to be equal to or less than the distance between the wall portions at the boundary with the second restriction section in the first restriction section. Thereby, the transition from the 1st regulation section to the 2nd regulation section can be made suitable.

Feature D5. The wall portion includes a pair of first wall portions (front facing wall portions 370 and 371) facing each other with a predetermined interval, and is gradually connected to the first wall portion with respect to the interval between the first wall portions. A set of connecting portions (continuous opposing wall portions 368, 369) set to be large, and a set of second wall portions that are connected to the connecting portions and face each other with a larger interval than the first wall portion. (Rear facing wall portions 366, 367),
The opposed portion includes a first contact portion (for example, protrusions 280a and 281a) that contacts the first wall portion and a second contact portion (for example, protrusions 276a and 277a) that contacts the second wall portion. ,
In the first section, the first contact portion is located in a region sandwiched between the connecting portions and a region sandwiched between the second wall portions,
Any of D2 to D4, wherein in the second section, the first wall portion and the first contact portion are in contact with each other, and the second wall portion and the second contact portion are in contact with each other. The gaming machine according to one.

  According to the feature D5, when the display unit is mounted, the first contact portion reaches the area sandwiched between the second wall portions. By forming a predetermined gap between the second wall portion and the first contact portion, it is easy to allow variation in the position of the display unit. When the display unit is pushed in, the first contact portion reaches the region sandwiched between the connecting portions, and the position variation is gradually regulated. When the display unit is further pushed in, the first contact portion comes into contact with the first wall portion, and the second contact portion comes into contact with the second wall portion. Thereby, the position variation of a display unit will be suppressed suitably.

  For example, both the first wall portions may be formed so as to be parallel to each other. Thereby, it becomes easy to suppress the positional variation of the display unit and to set the mounting direction in one direction. Similarly, both the second wall portions may be formed so as to be parallel to each other. However, it is preferable that the second wall portion be parallel to the first wall portion.

  For example, the first wall portion and the second wall portion may be configured to have a planar shape that stands up in the vertical direction. In this way, a practically preferable configuration can be realized. For example, in the configuration in which the display unit is supported by the support member, the vertical position variation of the display unit is suppressed by the weight of the display unit. Therefore, it is assumed that what should be noted when the display unit is mounted is mainly a positional variation in the horizontal direction. As described above, by adopting a configuration in which the first wall portion and the second wall portion have a planar shape in which they stand up in the vertical direction, it is possible to suitably suppress the positional variation in the horizontal direction.

  Further, particularly in the combination with the feature D4, a section in which the first wall portion and the first contact portion abut, a second wall portion and a second contact portion in addition to the first wall portion and the first contact portion. It is preferable to change the restriction level step by step by setting the section where the abutment is made so that the former is on the near side and the latter is on the back side.

Feature D6. A plurality of sets of the housing side connector and the unit side connector are provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of D2 to D5, wherein the housing-side connector is distributed around the housing-side regulating portion.

  It is assumed that the displacement of the relative position between the housing side connector and the unit side connector due to the position variation of the display unit tends to increase in proportion to the distance between each connector and the regulating means. In other words, in order to suppress the displacement of the relative positions of the housing side connector and the unit side connector, it is considered preferable to arrange each connector close to the regulating means. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the housing-side connector is distributed around the housing-side restricting portion, the distance between the connector and the restricting portion is increased even in a configuration having a plurality of connectors. This can be easily suppressed.

  For example, arrange the case side restricting part and each case side connector so that the distance dimension from the case side restricting part to the one case side connector is equal to the distance dimension from the case side restricting part to the other case side connector. Good.

Feature D7. A support member (partition plate 251) that removably supports the display unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of D2 to D6, wherein the housing-side connector and the housing-side regulating portion are provided on the support member.

  According to the feature D7, the housing side connector and the housing side restricting portion are concentrated on the support member, so that the relative position between the housing side connector and the unit side connector is less likely to occur. Specifically, when the housing side connector and the housing side regulating portion are individually attached to the housing or when only one of the housing side connector and the regulating portion is attached to the support member, Deviations in the relative positions of the housing-side connector, the housing-side restricting portion, and the support member can be reduced. More specifically, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to connect the housing side connector and the unit side connector due to the accumulation of positional variations.

Feature D8. The support member is a support plate that supports the display unit by coming into contact with the bottom of the display unit from below.
While having a plurality of the housing side connectors, each of the housing side connectors is arranged side by side,
The gaming machine according to D7, wherein the casing-side restricting portion is disposed between the casing-side connectors.

  As shown in the feature D8, the housing side connectors are arranged on both the left and right sides of the housing side restricting portion, and by suppressing the separation from the housing side restricting portion, in addition to the same effects as those shown in the feature D7, the following special effects Play. That is, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation between the housing side connector and the unit side connector in the vertical direction, and to make each connector suitable. Specifically, in the configuration in which the display unit is supported from the lower side by the support plate, the vertical position variation of the display unit is suppressed by the weight of the display unit. In particular, the vertical shift between the unit-side connector and the housing-side connector due to the inclination of the display unit can be suitably suppressed by bringing the unit-side connector and the housing-side connector closer to the support plate. In other words, as shown in this feature, by disposing the housing side connectors on the left and right sides of the housing side restricting portion, not only the distance from the housing side restricting portion of each housing side connector is reduced, but also The distance from the support plate can also be reduced. Thereby, even if it is a case where a tilt arises in a display unit, the coupling | bonding of each connector can be made hard to be inhibited.

  In addition, this feature is described as follows. “The housing side regulating portion is disposed at a position sandwiched between a right end portion and a left end portion in an arrangement region of the housing side connector group, and the unit side regulating portion is The gaming machine according to D7 may be replaced with a gaming machine according to D7, which is arranged at a position sandwiched between a right end and a left end in the arrangement region of the unit side connector group.

Feature D9. The support member is a support plate that supports the display unit by coming into contact with the bottom of the display unit from below.
The unit-side regulating portion is disposed in a portion facing the support plate (the bottom plate portion 310b of the inner housing 310) in the display unit, and is formed to have a groove shape.
The gaming machine according to D7 or D8, wherein the casing-side regulating portion forms a protrusion that fits into the groove-shaped portion.

  When the display unit is carried alone, it is assumed that interference (contact) with the outer shell portion of the display unit is likely to occur. For example, when the display unit is placed on the floor, the outer shell portion of the display unit and the floor surface interfere with each other. If the unit side restricting portion of the display unit has a protrusion, it is assumed that a load is easily applied to the protrusion. The unit-side restricting portion (protruding portion) is a portion that determines the mounting direction of the display unit, and the generation of a load as described above is not preferable because the unit-side restricting portion may be deformed or damaged. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the unit-side restricting portion has a groove shape, interference with the unit-side restricting portion can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to protect the unit side restricting portion.

  In a configuration in which the display unit is supported from below by the support plate, the bottom of the display unit has a function as a supported portion. When the display unit is transported or the like, this supported portion is considered to be supported. By making the unit side regulating portion into a groove shape, it is possible to avoid the concentration of the self-weight of the display unit with respect to the unit side regulating portion, and it is possible to realize a practically preferable configuration.

Feature D10. A grip portion (through long hole 355) of the display unit is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of D2 to D9, wherein the gripping part is disposed on the near side of the unit side regulating part and on an extension of the unit side regulating part.

  If you have a restricting means that restricts movement of the display unit in directions other than the mounting direction, when mounting the display unit, push the display unit in while checking the relative position between the unit-side restricting part and the housing-side restricting part. It is good to do. However, if the visual confirmation of the respective restricting portions is hindered by the display unit, the housing, or the like, the mounting operation of the display unit may be difficult. In such a case, it is necessary to store in advance the positions of the casing-side regulating unit and the unit-side regulating unit in advance and match the unit-side regulating unit to the casing-side regulating unit. According to this feature, the gripping portion is disposed on the extension of the unit side restriction portion of the unit side restriction portion. Thereby, the operator can grasp the position of the unit side restricting portion without visually confirming the position. That is, it is possible to easily set a guideline for mounting the display unit. Therefore, complication of work when the display unit is mounted can be suppressed.

  Feature D11. Any one of D2 to D10, wherein the space sandwiched between the wall portions is open to one side of the housing and the display unit that is not an object to be disposed of the wall portions. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature D11, the alignment direction of the housing side restriction portion and the unit side restriction portion is not limited to the mounting direction of the display unit, and the alignment work between the housing side restriction portion and the unit side restriction portion is facilitated. Can contribute.

  Feature D12. The gaming machine according to any one of D2 to D11, wherein the wall portion is set such that a length dimension of the wall portion in the mounting direction is larger than a distance dimension between the two wall portions.

  As shown in the feature D12, the wall portion is long in the mounting direction of the display unit and is shortened in the direction crossing the mounting direction, so that variation in the mounting track of the display unit can be easily suppressed. Specifically, it is possible to easily suppress the rotation of the display unit, and to realize a configuration that can easily stabilize the movement of the display unit in the mounting direction.

  Feature D13. The gaming machine according to any one of D2 to D12, wherein the facing portion is formed by an outer wall of one member.

  By forming each facing portion facing each wall portion with a single member, variations in relative positions of both facing portions can be suppressed. If each facing portion is formed by a separate member, it will be affected by the dimensional accuracy and mounting accuracy of these separate members. In particular, it is not preferable because variations in mounting accuracy tend to affect the relative positions of the opposing portions. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the facing portion is formed by the wall surface of one member, the influence due to the variation in the mounting accuracy can be avoided, and the variation in the relative position of both facing portions can be suppressed. Thereby, fitting with a housing side connector and a unit side connector can be made suitable.

Feature D14. A support plate (partition plate 251) that removably supports the display unit by contacting the bottom of the display unit from below;
The support plate has an installation part where the display unit is installed,
The gaming machine according to any one of D2 to D13, wherein the housing side regulating portion is arranged at a substantially center in the left-right direction of the installation portion.

  According to the feature D14, it is possible to suitably suppress the positional variation between the left and right sides of the display unit while simplifying the configuration by providing the housing side regulation portion at the approximate center in the left and right direction of the installation portion. It has become. Specifically, it is possible to suitably suppress the display unit from rotating left and right on the support plate. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the inconvenience that the coupling between the unit-side connector and the housing-side connector is hindered due to variations in the position of the display unit.

  Feature D15. Any of D1 to D14, wherein the second restriction section is set so that at least a restriction level in the connector coupling section is sharply higher than other sections constituting the second restriction section. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature D15, the restriction level in the connector coupling section is rapidly higher than the other sections in the second restriction section. As a result, the positioning accuracy of the display unit can be further improved, and the holding of the housing side connector and the unit side connector can be easily avoided.

  Also, by rapidly increasing the regulation level, the difference can be made clearer than when the regulation level is gradually increased. Thereby, it can be easily suggested that the connector coupling section has been reached, and it can be easily avoided that the display unit is pushed in vigorously. In the configuration in which the housing side connector and the unit side connector are coupled based on the pushing operation of the display unit, it is assumed that the weight of the display unit is easily concentrated on the coupling portion between the connectors. This is not preferable because it may cause damage to the connector pins. In this regard, if it can be suggested that there is a possibility of reaching the connector coupling section as described above, it is easy to avoid an excessive pushing operation by an operator, and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

  For example, in the second restriction section, a section that restricts sliding of the display unit in a direction that intersects the mounting direction and a section that restricts sliding and rotation of the display unit in a direction that intersects the mounting direction are set. Of these two sections, a connector coupling section may be set in the latter.

Feature D16. A gripping member (cap 266) provided on the housing side and gripped when the gaming machine is moved,
The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D14, wherein the gripping member is formed so as to restrict the floating of the display unit by contacting the display unit from above.

  Since the gripping member is a member that is gripped when the slot machine is moved, it is general that a predetermined strength is imparted so that deformation does not occur even if the weight of the casing is added. Thus, if it is set as the structure which regulates the lifting of a display member with the holding member which has predetermined | prescribed intensity | strength, a member with high intensity | strength will be unnecessary, and the lifting can be suppressed, suppressing the increase in a number of parts.

  In particular, in combination with the feature D7 or the like (configuration having a support member), a configuration in which a gripping member is mounted on the support member is preferable. Thereby, the structure which positions a display unit can be collected with respect to a supporting member, and a practically preferable structure can be implement | achieved.

Feature D17. A housing (housing 11) opened in front of the gaming machine;
A control device (for example, a main control device 610) that performs various controls relating to the game, and a pattern display device (reel device 550) that displays and displays a pattern during the game, the control device and the pattern display device are connected to the unit main body (inner housing). 310) a display unit (replacement unit 300) mounted in;
A support plate (partition plate 251) that removably supports the display unit by contacting the display unit from below;
A housing side connector (housing connectors 851, 852) provided on the housing side;
Unit-side connectors (replacement connectors 881 and 882) that are provided on the display unit side and are coupled to the housing-side connector as the display unit moves toward the back of the housing;
When the display unit is attached to the housing, the restricting means for restricting the movement of the display unit in the direction intersecting the attaching direction of the display unit (the guide of the rail member 270 of the partition plate unit 250 and the surface changing unit 300). Groove 360),
The regulating means is
A groove portion (guide groove 360) provided in a portion facing the support plate (the bottom plate portion 310b of the inner housing 310) in the display unit and extending in the front-rear direction;
The support plate is formed by a protruding portion (rail member 270) that is provided in a portion facing the display unit (a flat plate portion 252 of the partition plate 251) and fits in the groove portion,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the groove is disposed at a substantially center in the left-right direction of the display unit.

  According to the feature D17, it is possible to suitably suppress the positional variation between the left and right sides of the display unit by providing the groove in the approximate center in the left and right direction of the display unit. Specifically, it is possible to suitably suppress the display unit from rotating left and right on the support plate. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the inconvenience that the coupling between the unit-side connector and the housing-side connector is hindered due to variations in the position of the display unit.

Feature D18. The groove is
A pair of first wall portions (front facing wall portions 370 and 371) facing each other at a predetermined interval;
A pair of second wall portions (rear facing wall portions 366 and 367) which are located on the back side of the casing with respect to the first wall portion and are opposed to each other with a larger interval than the first wall portion. And
The protrusion is
A pair of first opposing portions (front vertical wall portions 280, 281) facing each first wall portion from the inside;
A first protrusion (for example, protrusions 280a and 281a) formed so as to protrude from each of the first opposing portions and to contact the first wall portion;
A pair of second opposing portions (rear side vertical wall portions 276, 277) that are located on the back side of the housing with respect to the first opposing portion and face each second wall portion from the inside;
A second protrusion (for example, protrusions 276a and 277a) formed so as to protrude from each of the second opposing portions and contact the second wall portion;
The groove and the ridge are
When the display unit is disposed at the first position, the first protrusion is in contact with the first wall portion, and the second protrusion is positioned on the near side of the second wall portion,
Based on the display unit being moved to a second position on the back side of the first position in a state where the first wall portion and the first protrusion are in contact with each other, the second protrusion and the first protrusion The two walls abut,
On the back side from the second position, the first protrusion and the first wall portion are configured to be kept in contact with the second protrusion and the second wall portion,
The gaming machine according to D17, wherein the housing-side connector and the unit-side connector are coupled based on the display unit being moved to the back side from the second position.

  According to the feature D18, the first opposing wall portion and the first protrusion formed on the ridge portion pass between the second wall portions of the groove portion by pushing the display unit into the back side of the housing. A gap is generated between the first opposing wall portion and the first protrusion and the second wall portion, and the position variation of the display unit is easily allowed. Thereby, when pushing in a display unit, the inconvenience that a protrusion part and a groove part can be used is hard to arise. That is, in the initial stage of mounting the display unit, the positional deviation restriction level is positively lowered to roughly suppress the positional deviation of the display unit due to the first opposing wall portion of the ridge portion and the second wall portion of the groove portion. In particular, it is possible to prevent the mounting operation of the display unit from becoming difficult.

  When the display unit is further pushed into the first position, the first protrusion comes into contact with the first wall portion, and the position variation of the display unit is more strictly regulated. When the display unit is pushed from the first position to the second position, the second protrusion is positioned on the near side of the second wall, so that the contact between the second protrusion and the second wall is avoided. Yes. That is, the position variation of the display unit is maintained in a state that is allowed to some extent. When the display unit reaches the second position, the second wall portion and the second protrusion come into contact with each other. As a result, the groove portion and the ridge portion come into contact with each other at the front and rear positions, and the mounting direction of the display unit is determined to be the same direction as the connecting direction between the housing side connector and the unit side connector. Become.

  In this way, the housing side connector and the unit side connector are coupled in a state where the mounting direction of the display unit is determined to be 1, so that the inconvenience that both the connectors can be used can be made difficult to occur. .

  As described in detail above, by adopting a configuration in which the regulation level of the positional variation is increased as the display unit is pushed in, the inconvenience that the mounting operation of the display unit becomes difficult is less likely to occur. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably perform connector coupling while avoiding complicated display unit mounting work.

  In particular, in this feature, each opposing wall portion of the ridge portion has a protrusion, and a contact portion with respect to each wall portion of the groove portion is limited. As a result, the regulation level increases between the state in which the first protrusion is in contact with the first wall portion and the state in which the first protrusion and the first wall portion are in contact with the second protrusion and the second wall portion. It is possible to suppress the difference between the restriction level and the second protrusion and the second wall portion in contact with each other. By causing a gradual change in the regulation level before the connector is connected, it is possible to indicate to the operator that the display unit has reached a position where the connector can be connected, and excessive push-in is performed. It is easy to avoid the operation.

Feature E1. A gaming machine front body (front door 12) constituting the gaming machine front portion;
A game medium discharging means (such as a hopper device 180) disposed on the back side of the gaming machine front body and discharging game media to the outside of the gaming machine via a payout portion (medal discharge port 34) of the gaming machine front body;
An installation part (lower plate 150) in which the game medium discharge means is installed;
A gaming machine comprising detection means (such as a hopper monitoring switch 230) for detecting movement of the gaming medium discharge means from a predetermined position of the installation section.

  According to the feature E1, when the game medium discharge means moves from a predetermined position, the movement is detected by the detection means. By monitoring the movement of the game medium discharge means using the detection means, fraud to the game medium discharge means can be suppressed. Further, even if the game medium discharging means is illegally moved, it is possible to easily grasp such facts and to suppress the occurrence of damage.

  The “arranged on the back side of the gaming machine front body to the game medium discharging means” means, for example, a configuration in which the gaming medium discharging means is arranged on the back surface of the gaming machine front body, and the gaming medium discharging means is a gaming machine front body. Including a configuration arranged on a separate member or the like provided on the back of the game machine, a configuration in which the game medium discharge means is arranged behind the front body of the gaming machine.

Feature E2. The game medium discharge means has at least one of a function of monitoring the discharge of game media and a function of controlling the discharge of game media by the game medium discharge means to manage the discharge of game media. A discharge management unit (payout control board 196 and medal detection sensor 197) to perform,
Based on the fact that the game medium discharge means is allowed to be removed from the game medium discharge means based on the movement of the game medium discharge means from the predetermined position, and the game medium discharge means is disposed at the predetermined position. The gaming machine according to E1, further comprising regulation means (such as a cover member 210 and a fixture 211) for regulating removal of the discharge management unit from the game medium discharge means.

  According to the feature E2, the movement of the game medium discharge unit by the detection unit is detected when the discharge management unit that is assumed to be a target of fraud is removed. That is, it is possible to monitor the removal of the discharge management unit using the detection means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat on the game medium discharge means, and it is possible to suppress illegal acquisition of the game medium.

Note that this means "the game medium discharge means is a monitoring means (medal detection sensor 197) for monitoring the discharge of game media and a control means for controlling the game medium discharge means to execute discharge of the game medium ( At least one of the payout control board 196),
Based on the movement of the game medium discharge means from the predetermined position, the monitoring medium and the control means provided on the game medium discharge means are allowed to be removed, and the game medium discharge means is moved to the predetermined position. It is provided with a removal restricting means (a cover member 210, a fixture 211, etc.) for restricting the removal of the monitoring means and the control means provided in the game medium discharge means based on being arranged. The gaming machine according to E1, which is characterized. Can also be replaced.

Feature E3. It has a case (housing 11) that is open in front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine front body closes an open portion of the housing so as to be openable and closable,
The game medium discharge means plays a storage tank (storage tank 181) for storing a game medium and a game medium stored in the storage tank from a payout portion (for example, a medal discharge port 34) provided on the front side of the game machine. A payout device (payout device 191) for paying out of the machine,
The game medium discharge means is disposed in the casing and is attached and detached through an open portion of the casing.
The casing defines a direction in which the game medium discharge means is attached and detached, and a guide section (guide rail 153) that guides the game medium discharge means to the predetermined position based on the movement of the game medium discharge means to the back side of the casing. ) Is provided, the gaming machine according to E1 or E2.

  According to the feature E3, when the game medium discharge unit is mounted, the game medium discharge unit is guided to a predetermined position by the defining unit. By defining the moving direction of the game medium discharge means in this way, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation and position variation of the game medium discharge means, and to make detection by the detection means more reliable.

  Feature E4. When the game medium discharge means is mounted along the mounting direction defined by the defining section, the game medium discharge means overlaps the detection means in a state where the game medium discharge means is disposed at the predetermined position, and the detection The gaming machine according to E3, further comprising a shielding part that shields the means (for example, the accommodation part 214 of the hopper device 180).

  According to the feature E4, when the movement of the game medium discharge means is detected by the detection means, the detection means is shielded by the shielding portion. For this reason, access to the detection means through the open part of the housing is prevented by the shielding portion, and it is possible to suppress an unauthorized operation on the detection means. For example, a shielding part may be provided on the game medium discharge means. Thereby, shielding of a detection means can be performed suitably, suppressing complication of composition.

  In addition, this feature is described as “overlapping to the detection unit from the near side in the mounting direction defined by the defining unit in a state where the game medium discharge unit is disposed at the predetermined position, and the detection It can be replaced with a “gaming machine according to E3,” which is provided with a shielding portion for shielding the means.

  Feature E5. The shielding portion forms an accommodation space (for example, an accommodation space HS or a closed space CS) for accommodating the detection means in a state where the game medium discharge means is arranged at the predetermined position. The gaming machine according to E4.

  According to the feature E5, the movement detection of the game medium discharge means by the detection means can be performed in a state where the detection means is accommodated in the accommodation space formed by the shielding portion. By placing the detection means in the accommodation space, it is possible to suppress exposure of the detection means. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the action of disturbing the operation of the detection means, and it is possible to contribute to further improvement of crime prevention. For example, the accommodation space may be constituted by a shielded space or a closed space that suppresses exposure of the detection means to the outside of the accommodation space.

Feature E6. The shielding portion includes a discharge means side shielding portion (for example, a cover accommodating portion 1068) provided on the game medium discharging means side and an installation portion side shielding portion (for example, a switch cover 1050) provided on the installation portion side. Have
The gaming machine according to E5, wherein the accommodation space is formed based on a combination of the discharging means side shielding portion and the installation portion side shielding portion.

  When the game medium discharge means is movably held, it is desirable that the detection means be hidden in accordance with the movement of the game medium discharge means. However, if the shielding part is provided only on either the installation part side or the game medium discharge means side, it may be difficult to access the detection means during maintenance or the like. This is not preferable from the viewpoint of workability. In this respect, in this feature, it is difficult to access the detection means when the game medium discharge means is attached, and it is easy to access the detection means when the game medium discharge means is removed. be able to. Thereby, the improvement of workability | operativity and the improvement of crime prevention can be made to make compatible both suitably.

  It should be noted that “the discharge means side shielding portion provided on the game medium discharge means side” and “the installation portion side shielding portion provided on the installation portion side” have a positional relationship based on the movement of the game medium discharge means. A set of shields arranged to vary is shown. That is, “the installation part side” indicates that the installation target of the installation part side shielding part is not necessarily limited to the installation part, but may be a configuration accompanying the installation part.

Feature E7. The shielding part is
It is provided on either the game medium discharge means side or the installation section side, surrounds the periphery of the detection means, and faces the other side in the mounting direction of the game medium discharge means defined by the defining section. An open first peripheral wall portion (for example, a cover housing portion 1068);
And a second peripheral wall portion (for example, a switch cover 1050) that is provided on the other side of the game medium discharge means side and the installation portion side and covers at least an area including an open portion in the first peripheral wall portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E4 to E6.

  According to the feature E7, the same effect as the feature E6 can be obtained. That is, the peripheral wall part which prevents access to a detection means is formed by combining the 1st peripheral wall part and the 2nd peripheral wall part. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the detection means to be operated in an unauthorized manner.

Feature E8. The detection means is provided to be switchable between a first position where the movement of the game medium discharge means is detected and a second position where the movement of the game medium discharge means is not detected. The first position and the second position are switched based on the movement of the game medium discharge means in the attachment / detachment direction defined by
The first peripheral wall portion and the second peripheral wall portion are the same until the detection means detects the movement of the game medium discharge means when the game medium discharge means is moved from the predetermined position. The gaming machine according to E7, wherein the open portion is covered with the second peripheral wall and the state is continued.

  As shown in this feature, the configuration according to features E4 to E7 is configured such that the position of the detection unit is switched in a state where the open portion of the first peripheral wall portion is covered with the second peripheral wall portion. Can be suitably realized, and unauthorized access to the detection means can be suppressed, and inconveniences such as hindering position detection by the detection means can be made difficult to occur.

  For example, the first peripheral wall portion and the second peripheral wall portion overlap each other in the direction defined by the defining portion, and the game required for switching the position of the detecting means from the second position to the first position The overlap amount (for example, overlap amount R1) of the first peripheral wall portion and the second peripheral wall portion may be set to be larger than the movement amount (slide amount S1) of the medium discharge means.

  Feature E9. The detection means is provided to be switchable between a first position where the movement of the game medium discharge means is detected and a second position where the movement of the game medium discharge means is not detected. Any one of E1 to E7, wherein the first position and the second position are switched based on the movement of the game medium discharge means in the attaching / detaching direction defined by The gaming machine described in one.

  According to the feature E9, the position of the detection unit is switched based on the movement of the game medium discharge unit (that is, the change in the position of the game medium discharge unit). In this way, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by using the mobile detection means.

  Specifically, fraud to the game medium discharge means can occur not only when power is supplied to the gaming machine but also when power supply is cut off (for example, at night) when power supply is cut off. . For this reason, it is preferable that the movement detection of the game medium discharge means is performed even when the power supply is cut off. In such a case, if a configuration using an optical non-contact sensor or the like is adopted, it is necessary to provide a power storage unit that stores power supplied to the sensor or the like when the power supply is cut off, and to further increase the power storage capacity of the power storage unit. . This is not preferable from the viewpoint of power saving. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration has a movable detection means, the power for operating the detection means can be reduced, which contributes to power saving.

  Particularly in the combination with the features E4 to E7 (that is, the combination with the configuration having the shielding part), the shielding part accesses the detection means while the shielding part is switched from the second position to the first position. By suppressing this, it is possible to make it difficult for the inconvenience that the position switching of the detection means is hindered.

Feature E10. The installation portion is a support plate that supports the game medium discharge means by contacting the game medium discharge means from below.
The detection means is disposed in a portion of the support plate facing the game medium discharge means,
In E8 or E9, the first position of the detecting means is a position protruding toward the game medium discharging means, and the second position is a position where protrusion is suppressed more than the first position. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E10, the game medium discharge means is supported from the lower side by the support plate, and the detection means is disposed in a portion of the support plate facing the game medium discharge means. Thereby, the movement of the detection means to the first position can be suppressed by the weight of the game medium discharge means. As described above, the game medium discharge means is held at the second position by its own weight, so that it is difficult to be affected by variations in the position of the game medium discharge means.

  Feature E11. The detecting means has a moving component in a direction perpendicular to the attaching / detaching direction of the game medium discharging means defined by the defining portion as a moving component based on switching between the first position and the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of E8 to E9, wherein the gaming machine is provided in the game machine.

  According to the feature E11, it is possible to detect not only the direction defined by the defining unit but also movement in another direction. Thereby, it is possible to easily detect an action of shifting the game medium discharge means while the detection means is held at the second position, and it is possible to contribute to further improvement of crime prevention.

  For example, a biasing unit that biases from the second position toward the first position, and a guide portion that leads from the first position to the second position based on the movement of the game medium discharge unit (for example, the flat portion 233 of the lever member 231). It is good to provide.

  Feature E12. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E11, wherein the detection means is attached to the installation portion.

  In order to notify the detection result of the detection means, it is necessary to connect the detection means to another device. If the detection means is mounted on the game medium discharge means, it is assumed that a release operation for releasing the connection is necessary for the attachment / detachment of the game medium discharge means, and there is a concern that the work becomes complicated. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the detection means is attached to the installation portion, the above-described inconvenience can be solved, and the complexity of the work can be suppressed.

Feature E13. It has a case (housing 11) that is open in front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine front body closes an open portion of the housing so as to be openable and closable,
The game medium discharge means plays a storage tank (storage tank 181) for storing a game medium and a game medium stored in the storage tank from a payout portion (for example, a medal discharge port 34) provided on the front side of the game machine. A payout device (payout device 191) for paying out of the machine,
The game medium discharge means is disposed in the casing and is attached and detached through an open portion of the casing.
The installation portion is a support plate that is fixed to the housing and supports the game medium discharge means by coming into contact with the game medium discharge means from below.
The gaming machine according to E12, wherein the detection unit is configured to be removable from the support plate based on the support plate being removed from the housing.

  According to the feature E13, the detection means can be removed based on the removal of the support plate. The support plate has a function of supporting the game medium discharge means, and the removal of the support plate easily accompanies the movement of the game medium discharge means. This makes it difficult to remove the detection means.

Feature E14. A stipulating part (guide rail 153) that regulates the attaching / detaching direction of the game medium ejecting means and guides the game medium ejecting means to the predetermined position based on the movement of the game medium ejecting means to the rear side of the housing;
A fixing tool (fixing tool 152) for fixing the support plate to the housing;
The game machine according to E13, wherein the fixture is arranged at a position on the back side in the mounting direction of the game medium discharge means defined by the defining portion relative to the game medium discharge means.

  According to the feature E14, access to the fixing device can be prevented by the game medium discharge means itself, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game medium discharge means, the support plate, and the detection means to be removed together. Moreover, an effective crime prevention measure can be realized by suppressing illegal acts on the game medium discharging means by the detecting means and suppressing illegal acts on the detecting means by the game medium discharging means.

Feature E15. A stipulating part (guide rail 153) that regulates the attaching / detaching direction of the game medium ejecting means and guides the game medium ejecting means to the predetermined position based on the movement of the game medium ejecting means to the rear side of the housing;
A fixing tool (fixing tool 1090) for fixing the support plate to the housing;
The game machine according to E13 or E14, wherein when the game medium discharge means is disposed at the predetermined position, the game medium discharge means is located on a removal track of the fixture.

  As shown in the feature E15, the game medium discharging means is disposed on the fixing track of the fixing tool, so that the removal of the fixing tool can be prevented by the game medium discharging means. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the illegal act against the game medium discharging means by the detecting means, and to suppress the illegal act against the detecting means by the game medium discharging means, thereby realizing an effective crime prevention measure.

Feature E16. A housing (housing 11) opened in front of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine front body (front door 12) covering an open part of the housing;
In order to pay out a storage tank (storage tank 181) for storing game media and the game media stored in the storage tank to the outside of the gaming machine from a payout portion (for example, medal discharge port 34) provided on the front surface of the gaming machine. A hopper device (such as a hopper device 180) disposed inside the housing,
A support plate (lower plate 150) that is provided in the housing and detachably supports the hopper device by contacting the hopper device from below;
Detecting means (such as a hopper monitoring switch 230) for detecting movement of the hopper device from a predetermined position of the support plate;
The hopper device is
A discharge management unit (payout control) that manages the discharge of game media having at least one of a function of monitoring the discharge of game media and a function of controlling the discharge of game media by the game medium discharge means Board 196 and medal detection sensor 197),
An accommodating portion (housing 192) for accommodating the discharge management portion;
An opening (opening 199) that allows removal of the discharge management section from the housing section;
With
The gaming machine, wherein the opening is covered with the support plate.

  According to the feature E16, when the hopper device moves from a predetermined position, the movement of the hopper device is detected by the detecting means. The hopper device is provided with a discharge management unit for managing the discharge of game media. To remove the discharge management unit, it is necessary to take the hopper device out of the housing or lift it within the housing. By detecting these movements by the detection means, unauthorized access to the discharge management unit can be suitably suppressed.

  The technical idea shown in each of the above features can be applied to this feature.

Feature E17. Game medium payout means (hopper device 180, etc.) for paying out game media;
An installation part (lower plate 150) in which the game medium discharge means is installed;
A gaming machine comprising detection means (such as a hopper monitoring switch 230) for detecting movement of the gaming medium discharge means from a predetermined position of the installation section.

  According to the feature E17, there is an effect similar to the effect shown in the feature E1. In other words, when the configuration related to payout of the game medium is moved from a predetermined position, the movement can be detected by the detecting means. Thereby, it is possible to easily find fraud in the configuration related to payout of game media. Note that the technical ideas shown in E2 to E15 described above may be applied to this feature.

Feature E18. Control means (monitoring side MPU 811) for executing monitoring control as to whether or not movement of the game medium discharge means is detected;
A notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 410) controlled by the control means to execute notification based on the fact that the movement of the game medium discharge means is specified by the control means; A gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E17, comprising:

  According to the feature E18, when the game medium discharge means is moved, the fact is notified by the notification means. For this reason, even if the gaming medium discharging means is illegal, it is possible to prompt the hall manager to confirm the fact and contribute to early detection of the illegality.

Feature E19. Control means (monitoring side MPU 811) for executing monitoring control as to whether or not movement of the game medium discharge means is detected;
Transmitting means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 410) for transmitting detection information to the outside of the gaming machine based on the fact that the movement of the gaming medium discharging means is specified by the control means. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E18, characterized in that:

  According to the feature E19, when the game medium discharge unit is moved, the detection information is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a hall management computer) by the transmission unit. For this reason, even if the gaming medium discharging means is illegal, it is possible to prompt the hall manager to confirm the fact and contribute to early detection of the illegality.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Separable slot machine: a case opened in front of a gaming machine, a front door for opening and closing the open part of the case, a partition plate that divides the internal space of the case up and down, and various controls relating to games A display device having a control device for performing display, a pattern display device for variably displaying a sequence of patterns composed of a plurality of patterns in the game, and a control unit and the display device mounted in the unit body, and a game medium (medal) A hopper device for paying out the gaming machine from a payout portion provided on the front door, the display unit being disposed above the partition plate, and the hopper being below the partition plate The device is arranged, the variation of the pattern is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, the variation of the pattern is stopped when the stopping operation means is operated, and the final stop picture at the time of the stop There gaming machine so as to generate favorable special game state to the player (bonus game and the like) in the case of specific picture.

  Rotating gaming machine using a ball: variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence of a plurality of symbols in a variably displayed state after the variation is displayed, and the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, Due to the operation of the stop operating means or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game state advantageous to the player (required that the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol) Bonus game, etc.), a ball receiving tray is provided, a loading device for performing a loading process for taking a game ball from the ball tray, and a paying device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by the apparatus.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine as game machine, 11 ... Housing, 11c ... Back plate, 12 ... Front door as opening / closing body, 410 ... Liquid crystal display device constituting notification means, 620 ... Main control board as control board, 630 ... Substrate box as a substrate case, 631 ... Front side structure as a first case structure, 632 ... Back side case structure as a second case structure, 645 ... Front side peripheral wall part constituting a structure side defining part, 685 ... Back side peripheral wall portion constituting constituent body side defining portion, 667... Box side coupling portion, 668... Support portion as trace means, 710... Base unit as holding means, 720 .. base member, 740 .. holding member, 761. Guide groove constituting the side defining portion, 790... Main controller monitoring switch as detection means, 791. ... secondary controller, bulged portion constituting the monitoring side MPU, 823 ... detecting means removable regulating portion as 811 ... control unit, the closed space as CS ... accommodation space.

Claims (1)

A control board for controlling the game,
An internal space is formed, and a substrate case in which the control board is accommodated in the internal space;
Holding means for detachably holding the substrate case;
Detecting means for detecting movement of the substrate case from a predetermined position relative to the holding means when the substrate case is removed from the holding means;
A base on which the holding means is movably attached;
A fixture for fixing the pedestal to a mounting base;
While the substrate case is held by the holding means, the movement range of the holding means is regulated to be a predetermined range, while the predetermined range is set when the substrate case is removed from the holding means. A regulating portion that allows the movement of the holding means beyond,
The gaming machine is configured so that the fixing device can be attached and detached when the holding means moves beyond the predetermined range.

Images